No purchases yet.
Your cart is empty 0 items $0.00 Go to Checkout 0 Login

Author: Michael Moodie

Michael Moodie is a Freelance Photographer and Photojournalist. He Enjoys Lifestyle Photography and Traveling while doing all things creative!

How To Tell Stories Through Architectural Photography

Architectural photography at the first glance might seem or look like a rather boring genre of photography to be interested in. I myself once thought this as well until I started to look beyond the idea of these buildings just being what they are, buildings. I slowly started to see the creative value in these structures and began to appreciate them by telling a story through my images. Architectural photography has so much more to offer than what meets the eye. In this article, I will be sharing a few tips as to how you can use architectural photography to tell a story through your images. Some if not most of these tips I learned myself through practice and putting effort into seeing the bigger picture behind these buildings. Without dragging this introduction out any longer, let’s begin.

1. Research

Architecture is a very interesting and vast field that encompasses many important things. A lot these buildings were built with careful thought and design into every square foot. Some of these buildings were built before way before we were even born but still manage to keep their integrity and beauty throughout the decades. Before we get excited and decide to grab our camera and other gear, it’s important to first get an understanding of your subject.


Getting an understanding of your subject will innately add more meaning to your photographs and also allow you as the photographer to appreciate your subject more as well. A lot of these buildings hold historical meanings within their walls and have made their fair contribution to history. Your research will help you to share this historical contribution through the shots that you take and by extension help to give a deeper meaning to your shots as well.

2. Contrast

Creating or looking for more contrast when composing architectural shots can help to enhance your image and also add to your story as well. Every building is different in its own and will evoke its own style and look through the materials used to build it. So for example, you will receive a different feel or mood from an image of a modern-day building made with ridiculous amounts of glass and concrete than a building that was made out of stone in the 1800s. The contrast in your shots will help to show the differences in these two architectures and evoke a different feel as it regards to the story told by each building.


Contrast helps to make every crack, crevis, window, and stone on a building look a lot richer and you can almost see the history seeping through the image as well.

3. Shoot Continuously

To create a good story you need to have a series of different scenes. To do this you want to create a series of images when photographing a specific building. You will more than likely have to keep moving and shooting at the same time to capture different angles and perspectives of your subject as you would when shooting with a model. The only difference here is that this model is not able to change her poses and look at the camera so you will have to do most of the work. Giving different perspectives will assist in giving your viewer a better understanding of what your subject had to offer and create an imaginary timeline for your story.


4. Include Surroundings

These stunning Architectures themselves might be very impressive and captivating but don’t forget that it’s often where the building is that helps to add to its character. Try to include some of these surroundings within your shot to add more character as well as give a sense of what the ambiance or atmosphere is like around this building.


So, for example, if there is a bike just casually leaning on the side of the building, composing that shot properly can help to add some character and improve your story as well. Telling a story through photography is all about taking the little things that are often deemed insignificant and given significance in your frame.

5. Details

Capturing small details in pretty much anything and not only architectural photography helps to improve and add to your storytelling as well. There is a saying that “It’s all in the details” which is actually true as details themselves can help to tell a story. If you were to capture the details in the architecture of a building then you could easily show the age or historical importance of the building. These small details will help to add diversity to your series as well as introduce a new perspective.


It is always a pleasure sharing these simple but important tips with you. I hope some of these tips and tricks have come in handy and proven to be an asset when practicing your architectural photography. Thank you for stopping by and until next time, take care.

Tips to Consider for Minimalism in Photography Work

The idea of minimalism or becoming a minimalist has been a topic of conversation recently. This idea not only extends to photography but everyday life as well. Being a minimalist itself is a certain lifestyle that you adapt as you go along. The way you do everything such as traveling or even how you live changes to adjust to having less around you and only the necessities you need. Everyone can be a minimalist in their own way as we all live a different lifestyle and enjoy many different things. However, in today’s article, I will be sharing with you how we can apply this minimalistic lifestyle to our photography as well and create stunning minimalistic images. The concept of ‘less is more’ will become your new rule when composing shots in a minimalistic sense and begin your quest to becoming a great minimalist photographer. Let’s begin!

1. Composition

One of the first tips to becoming a good minimalist photographer is learning how to compose your shots correctly. This does not necessarily mean that you were composing your shots incorrectly before but rather that you will be making a few changes to your style or habit in composition. Minimalism is all about simplicity and not cluttering your frame with too many elements that can be distracting to the viewer or yourself.

minimalist photography

Don’t mistake simplicity for boring composition. Many people believe that having a minimalist approach to photography is boring and easy to do. However, this is where they’re completely wrong as composing shots in a minimalistic style take a lot more creativity that one thinks. You are no longer just bringing your camera up to your face to just snap a shot. You will find yourself carefully planning and considering what it is that will be in your frame and how you would like these things to be positioned within it. You will begin to ask yourself a series of questions before you even pull up your camera until you naturally start to see things as a true minimalist.

2. Colors

Colors also play a huge part in achieving a minimalist effect through your images. You generally want to look for bright or contrasting colors within your frame that will stand out once you add the right amount of contrast when editing. The colors don’t have to be extremely bright but bright enough that they all work well with each other. I usually recommend not having too many variations in color as this can also be distracting and take away from the simplicity of the image. It is also good to consider adding some texture to your shot to help improve the visual appeal of lines and other elements.

minimalist photography

3. Lines And Patterns

Speaking of using lines to create visual appeal brings me to my next tip of using lines and patterns correctly. Once lines or patterns are used in the right way when composing a minimalistic shot it can really add an extra layer of creativity. However, remember to keep it simple and not use too much as it can go from minimalistic to confusing and chaotic very quickly.

minimalist photography

4. Negative Space

Using negative space to your advantage is a huge part of minimalistic photography as it helps with many things. One of those things is placing emphasis on the subject in your shot. A lot of negative space allows your subject to shine no matter what and enhances the isolation of that subject as well. When trying to achieve negative space, remember that this does not mean to angle your camera in a specific direction nor does it mean always following the rule of third. Achieving negative space allows less clutter to be in your image and more dramatic compositions.

minimalist photography

5. Editing

Practicing minimalism in photography does not stop when you’ve put your camera back in your camera bag but it also extends to when you’re editing as well. A lot like how you’ve shot on camera, you want to keep your edits simple as well. I know as photographers we can sometimes get carried away wanting to improve everything in our shot to make it perfect but from time to time imperfection is perfection. Try to avoid highly saturating your images, adding too much contrast or doing intense color corrections. Keep these things to a minimum as much as possible to stay within the borders of a simplistic look. It always helps to add things such as grain to your shots because emulates a little bit of a film look which also adds to the style of minimalistic photography.

I truly hope some of these simple but useful tips have been a great help in assisting you to practice and become better and minimalism in photography. It’s always a pleasure to share these simple tips with you guys and I look forward to seeing you again.

Over 6 Portrait Photography Mistakes Commonly Made

Portrait photography could probably be considered one of the most popular genres of photography as it is practiced amongst many photographers across the world. However, due to its popularity and influence in regards to photographers and even individuals that are not professional photographers, there are many mistakes commonly made. Some of these mistakes are pretty simple and often overlooked. In this article, I aim to list some of these common mistakes and share a few tips as well as to how you can correct them and ensure that they don’t happen often or happen again overall. With that said, let’s begin.

1. Bad Composition

One of the first common mistakes made in portrait photography is simply having a bad composition of your subject. Composition pretty much speaks to how you frame your shot before the image and when the image is taken. Some of the things that constitute bad composition are the placement of your subject, talent or model. Often I see photographers make the mistake that I even made myself as a beginner of leaving too much negative space above the head of your model.


Unless you are planning to fill this space with graphics or some special effects in photoshop, it is completely pointless and can take away from the image itself. Another mistake made in the composition is having your subject at the end or close to the end of your frame. Having your subject too far to the right or too far to the left will also create negative space and throw off the balance of your image. When taking portraits, it important to always remember the rule of thirds.

2. Eyes Out Of Focus

With the eyes being the windows to the soul and probably one for the most important parts of your portrait, you want to make sure you capture them correctly. Blurred or out of focus eyes can easily take away from the quality and professionalism within your portrait. Try to ensure your focus points are at the eyes of your subject. Eyes captured perfectly in a portrait will help to make it that much more stunning and even demand the attention of your viewers.


3. Too Much Out Of Focus

While as photographers we all love a nicely isolated subject, that can sometimes take away from our shot. Having a nicely blurred background is always amazing but you don’t want to have too much blurred. Try to maintain enough focus within your shot so that you get a nice blurred background but also maintain sharpness in your subject as well. If you’re shooting with a 50mm f/1.4 or a 50mm f/1.8, I would recommend not always set it to the lowest value but rather stick to a value of about f/2.4 to be safe.

4. Not Taking Enough Shots

I still sometimes fall victim to this mistake as it becomes a bad habit. When you take a few shots of your subject and pause to look on your LCD screen with the idea that you’ve got the perfect shot you need but later realize you don’t have enough options. This can prove to be pretty frustrating when you’re editing as your options become limited and you’re stuck with only a small amount of shots to choose from. This can cause problems with your clients as well.


Your clients might be expecting a certain amount of edited variations in the shots you’ve taken but you’ve found yourself only being able to provide very similar shots. My advice would be to shoot continuously and have a wide range of options to choose from so you can spend time on picking the right batch.

5. Not Enough Variations

Not taking enough photos brings me to my next point of not having much variation in your images as well. Don’t mistake taking a thousand photos of the same thing at the same angle as position as having variation. To have variation in your shots you would need to change your perspective of shooting and also take time out to change around the position or poses of your subject as well. It is very easy to misconstrued having a lot of shots as having a lot of variation which will cause an issue during post-production.


6. No Creative Direction

As photographers who are beginners or even professionals, we will not always end up capturing someone who’s an experienced model or know exactly how to pose or what they’re doing. These days you will find a lot of clients saying they just want some “Nice Pictures” which doesn’t give you much to work with in terms of styling the shoot but nonetheless you have to get creative. When you don’t give enough creative direction to your subject then you will end up not getting the shots you want or need. Remember, they can’t read your mind nor are they as experienced as you would like them to be so you must communicate what you would like for them to do. I went through this challenge myself when I was a beginner which slowly taught me more and more how to communicate and connect with my model or subject.


7. Not Shooting With Confidence

Sometimes it becomes too easy for us to doubt or compare ourselves to others. We already doubt whatever it is we are doing and reconsider if we are good enough to even be a photographer. This attitude will often reflect on how you capture your subject or even on your subject themselves. Pace yourself and understand that you are creative in your own lane and your space so you should also create at your own pace. It is safe to admire the work of other photographers, but try not to compare yourself to them as this will only reflect in your work as well.

6 Easy Ways To Improve Your Landscape Photography

Capturing beautiful and visually pleasing scenery can be one of the most enjoyable moments as a photographer who’s a favorite genre of photography is landscape photography. However, as someone who enjoys doing lifestyle photography, I can almost share the same appreciation and enjoyable moments as well. When it comes to landscape photography, there is so much you can do or capture with what’s in front of you. Mother nature is pretty much your muse and how you’d like to capture her is completely up to you in regards to how you see her with your creative eye. However, there are ways we can improve how we capture our muse which I will share in this article. Some of these simple and easy tips will help to improve how you capture landscapes and should open your creative eye to a different perspective. Let’s dive in.

1. A Point Of Interest

One of the first step in the right direction to improve your landscape photography is to include a point of interest when composing your shot. Usually, you find a lot of photographers capture shots of the horizon or basic scenery shot but there is no actual point of interest to grab your attention within the frame. Your point of interest can be pretty much anything such as a tree or even fence but adding one can help to make your landscape images a lot better.

The aim is to be unique and not your cliche landscape photographer because I assure you someone has probably taken a similar landscape shot as you have. Mother nature is your muse and it is your duty to show a new perspective of her that will help to make her even more interesting and beautiful. Change your perspective and let your creativity speak through your images.


2. Simplicity

There is beauty in simplicity and as a true minimalist, I had to share this point as well. It’s often given that you don’t clutter your frame with other elements that don’t add value to your shot but you can sometimes push that envelope a little further. Try to eliminate as many distractions as possible to place emphasis on not only the point of interest within your shot but on the scenery itself as well. Distractions in landscape photography can be anything such as telephone wires, lamppost, and other elements as well. Eliminating these things will help to improve your landscape photography drastically.


3. Timing

Timing plays an important role in almost every genre of photography that is done outdoors. However, it plays a very significant role when it comes to landscape photography. The timing of your landscape shots can pretty much dictate how a lot of your shots will look. For example, if you were to capture shots at sunrise as opposed to capturing shots at midday then you will see a clear and undeniable different in the mood of your shot. Use time as a tool to get the shots you desire or what will work best for the mood you are trying to evoke through your shots.


4. Eye On The Prize

Take some time to clear your mind before you take your camera out and focus on what it is you are looking to get out of the shots you’ll be taking or even the landscape in front of you. Take into careful consideration if you are looking to have so your shot out of focus or have an edge to edge sharpness or how you’d like to compose your frame. Having a clear vision of what you’re looking to achieve will help you achieve that goal even faster. Knowing what you want can help you to produce not only stunning landscape images but some legendary ones as well.

5. Low ISO

Try to always shoot at a low ISO when capturing landscape shots and compensate for it by adjusting your other settings such as your aperture and your shutter speed. The reason for this is because shooting at a low ISO helps to reduce the amount of grain in your image which can sometimes be annoying. I usually recommend staying between 100-400 when it comes to your ISO value but if you can keep it as low as possible at 100 then that would be perfect and help to improve the quality of your landscape shot as well. A lot of people also like to print landscape shots as they make good images to frame and hang on walls. Shooting at a low ISO will also help to improve image quality for it to be printed as well.


6. Polarizing Filter

Accessories such as polarizing filter can be very useful when taking landscape shots. If you’ve not already used one or have one, you should look into getting one for the lens you use when doing landscape photography. The polarizing filter essential helps to enhance the color and contrast in your images while reducing glare at the same time. A polarizing filter, when used at the right time, can be very helpful but also keep in mind it’s just for particular settings. If the scene in front of you has a body of water, sky, rich colors and reflections then you will find this filter helpful.



I hope this article has helped to improve some if not all of your landscape shots. I always appreciate you stopping by to give these articles a read and look forward to seeing you again.

How To Get The Most Of Photography In Harsh Light

I know many times as photographers we wish we had control over our lighting conditions in natural light but sadly it’s always unpredictable. We usually have to play a game with mother nature and go along with however she’s feeling on a particular day and complete our craft. Sometimes’s we’re lucky and end up getting ideal photography or lighting situations such as a golden hour or a slightly overcast sky. Then there are days when the lighting conditions are challenging like shooting in harsh light and you become demotivated. Thankfully In today’s article, I will be running through a few quick tips as to how you can achieve some pretty good images while shooting in harsh light. This is a very common challenge for photographers, especially beginners so let’s dive in.

1. Bounce Light

One of the first tips I recommend is trying to bounce the light on your subject. With harsh light often comes harsh shadows which can sometimes be used as a creative tool but in most cases, it’s annoying to have harsh shadows in your shot. By using a reflector to bounce the light onto your subject and fill out these areas with intense shadows will make the light on your subject more evenly distributed. If you don’t have a reflector you can consider using a natural reflector such as concrete. Many photographers don’t know that concrete acts as a natural reflector and will bounce light back onto your subject. If possible, find a concrete area and give it a try to see if it helps to fill out those harsh shadows on your subject.

direct sunlight photography

2. Diffuse Light

Another way to successfully practice photography or complete a session in harsh light is to use a diffuser. A diffuser will work to soften the direct sunlight that is beaming down on your subjects face. If possible, have someone hold a diffuser in front of the direction from which the rays of sunlight are coming and this should work to even out the light on your subject. The diffuser will create a softer source of light while distributing this light evenly as well. This is a popular method I have used on almost all my shoots when I do end up in harsh light situations.

3. Move Your Subject Around

Moving your model or subject around a little bit can sometimes help to find that sweet spot. As photographers, we get so excited and comfortable when we finally find that one spot where the lighting is perfectly even and soft. To find this you should explore different spots and positions with your model just to get a variety of different lighting situations as well as finding an ideal spot that works well for you as the photographer. A mistake many of us make is not moving around enough so we end up having shots with the same harsh lighting conditions.

photography in bright sunlight

4. Shadows

As I mentioned earlier, there is harsh light you can also find shadows. These shadows can sometimes work as a creative tool in the composition of your shots if used correctly. Take the time out to try a few frames with some shadows in them and see how they turn out as you may never know. You might just end up liking a few of them.

5. Find Some Shade

Shade often helps to create ideal lighting situations that can work to your advantage in harsh light situations. Sometimes the easiest way to enjoy a photography session in harsh sunlight is to simply get out of it. Explore the space around you and find nice well lit but shaded area to capture a few shots. Keep in mind that shade is necessarily the absence of sunlight but rather light being naturally diffused from bouncing through a medium to then get to your subject. Isn’t amazing how light works?

shooting in bright sunlight

6. Count Down

Shooting in harsh light is not only a challenge on the photographer but also on the model as well. In most cases, you will find where light is shining directly into the eyes of your subject which can be very uncomfortable and in some cases painful. To avoid capturing this expression in your shots and also considering the best interest of the model, it is recommended that you do a count down. A countdown basically helps to prevent any discomfort and gives your model or talent a heads up as to when exactly you will be taking your image so they can be prepared.

7. Shoot Underexposed

With the advancement of technology in this day and age, most cameras tend to recover shadows pretty well. It is relatively easy to blow your highlights out of proportion during a midday shoot in harsh light but shooting a little underexposed in RAW format will save you a lot of work and hassle.

21 Coolest Landscape Photos of 2019 You Should Check Now

Landscape photography is a very interesting genre of photography for many reasons. One of these reasons is that nature is now your muse and it is now up to you as the photographer to show others how you’d like nature to look in your frame. It would be amazing if you could tell mother nature how to pose and what to do once she’s in front your camera but when it comes to landscape photography its all about how creative you can get with the scenery in front of you and what you can make stand out to your viewers. At first, when I just started in photography I found this challenge particularly hard and a little boring because I wasn’t seeing things with a creative perspective but rather seeing my frames at face value.

I’m personally still on a quest to improve and become a lot better at my landscape photography as I hunt for breathtaking locations and embark on adventures. A huge part of landscape photography is venturing into the unknown hoping to see something majestic that catches your eye. You never really know what mother nature has in store for you which is what I can only imagine some of these photographers themselves thought when they took these shots.

In this article, I will be proudly sharing with you some of the coolest landscape photographs I have seen so far. Some of these shots are simply just breathtaking and even seem unreal. However, here are 21 of the coolest landscape photos along with their respective photographers.

1. Quiet Light

The first one of these cool landscape photos that we will be looking at is called “Quiet Light”. I must say it was named perfectly as we see rays of sunlight peaking through what seems to be trees in a forest. The light seems very soft and not too harsh in the frame, just enough to add a majestic element to the shot.

landscape photos

This picture was taken by Adam Gibbs who’s a well-known award-winning landscape photographer.

2. Frozen Giants

The next one up on my list is the “Frozen Giants”. This image was taken by Ignacio Palacios from Sydney, Australia. Ignacio is a Multi-Award winning travel photographer who’s produced stunning work that has made me a fan today.


3. Clouds Gather In South America

This landscape shot is pretty cool to me and was taken by Xiao Zhu who’s from China. What stood out for me in this landscape shot that made it cool is how he captured that ray of golden hour sunlight on the mountains in the distance. In addition to that, the little puddles that also showed a reflection of these mountains work pretty well and added that extra oomph to the image.

cool landscape photos

4. When Clouds Are Moving

It amazes me how some of these photographers just end up in the best location at the right time to capture stunning frames like this. The name of this landscape shot is called “When Clouds Are Moving”. The name is pretty accurate as you can see the slight motion blur of the clouds as they move through what seems to be a valley. I particularly enjoy the colors in this shot as they are very subtle. This image was taken by Peter Svoboda of Slovakia. He is also a Multi-Award Winning photographer which is exemplified in his work.

cool landscape photos

5. Calmness Before The Wind Blows

This gorgeous landscape shot was also taken by the amazing Peter Svodoba. What made this shot cool is the mountains in the distance again with that hint of golden hour light coming in. Also the slight steadiness of the water with little ripples shown to give you an idea that calm winds are passing through. You can almost feel this landscape shot as if you were right there with Peter.

cool landscape photos

6. Alone

Talented Photographer Roberto Marchegiani from Italy did an excellent job at using the fog to his advantage in this cool landscape photo. The title ties very well with the image itself “Alone” as we see what seems to be a single mangrove in the center of the frame with other mangroves to the side on each end. I enjoy the moodiness of it created by the fog as it adds to the whole idea of being sad and alone.

cool landscape photos

7. Rustle Of Colorful Leaves

Seeing the seasons of the year shown through beautiful landscape shots is something I will always enjoy. Oliver Wehrli of Switzerland definitely achieved that as we see the colorful season of Fall shown in this cool shot.


8. The White Mountains National Forest

This landscape shot was taken by Matt MacPherson of the United States. It was taken in New Hampshire showing the beauty in winter and just how stunning mother nature can be.

cool landscape photos

9. South Coast Of Australia

This was taken by Warren Keelan of Australia. It’s amazing how the curl in that wave was captured. The wave itself almost looked angelic as that ray of sunlight shines down on it.

cool landscape photos

10. Between Waynoka & Enid

John Finney, who’s from the United Kingdom, traveled all the way to the United States to capture this marvelous shot in Oklahoma. This landscape shot basically speaks for itself with amazing composition among these cool landscape photos.

landscape photos

11. The Red Sand Garden

Mother nature can sometimes be the true artist and us as photographers pretty much just spectators. In this case, mother nature shows off her talent to us again. This shot was captured by Peter Virag of Australia. The patterns created by the lands makes this image exceptionally beautiful along with how the red sand stands out.


12. Narvtinden

This shot was taken by Daniel Lean of the Netherlands. Beautifully composed with the rays of golden hour sunlight shining on the mountains in the distance. Makes this image a truly enjoyable one.

cool landscape photos

13. White Mountains

Landscape photography in low light or even in the night can be pretty tricky but if done correctly, it can yield some amazing result. I could only imagine what Werner Van Steen reaction was after he took this shot. This image was taken in California, USA but the photographer is actually from Belgium.

cool landscape photos

14. Mount Bromo

Some shots will leave you speechless as you begin to think about what the photographer had to go through just to make this one-shot happen. When I look at this image taken by Callie Chee of Australia, that is exactly what comes to mind.

cool landscape photos

15. Pindan Shoreline

This shot was taken by Mat Beetson of Austalia. Composed lovely with very vivid colors and minimalistic.

16. Calafuria Cliffs

The Calafuria cliffs in Italy were beautifully captured by the photographer Nicola Pirondini who’s also from Italy as well.

cool landscape photos

17. National Park Bayerischer Wald

Another example of the magic that can be created when you combine low light photography and landscape photography as well. The stars in this shot are marvelous and almost seems unreal. This was perfectly taken by Lukas Vesely of the Czech Republic.

cool landscape photos

18. Hanksville

Miles Morgan of the United States really did an amazing job with this landscape shot. The image itself is very captivating.

cool landscape photos

19. Namib-Naukluft National Park

This shot was taken by Tom Putt of Australia. Again showing off how artistic mother nature can be without even trying.


20. Eastern Sierra

Loving the colors and composition captured by the amazing Cindy Lee Hoover of the United States. Definitely, it had to take part in this list of cool landscape photos!


21. Keetmanshoop

Last but not least a shot taken by Andrey Omelyanchuk of the Russian Federation. This shot cool due to the various textures in the frame, its composition and not to mention the colors.


I hope this huge list of some of the coolest landscape photos has encouraged you to get out there and capture some shots of your own. Who knows, you might even end up on a list like this. Thank you so much for stopping by and until next time, take care.

Photography Pricing Guide: Tips In Confidently Pricing Your Photography

Many times we end in situations where things get awkward once the money is involved. For some reason, there is a tension floating in the air whenever the time comes to ask for what’s rightfully yours in regards to getting paid for work that has been done. When I first started in photography I was completely confused when individuals would as me for my prices. I would usually deflect or create an excuse as to why I can’t give them an exact price at the moment or have a price list to show them as reference. This was a fault of mine because I was not really focused on earning money from my passion for the field of photography but was rather just enjoying the process of creating and what I could create. This is something very common amongst new or upcoming photographers.

Pricing your work can be pretty tricky as there are many things to consider before giving a potential client an estimate as to how much a session or project will cost. The biggest fear most photographers is scaring away a client because they’re charging too much or end up cheating themselves in the long run because they didn’t charge enough for the work that is being done. I once made the mistake of undercharging my clients and suffered greatly because of this. I found myself doing tremendous amounts of work and did not feel as if the money earned from all my work was actually worth it. In this article, I will be sharing with you a few tips that you can consider as a Photography Pricing Guide, on how you can confidently charge or price your photography services to clients.

1. Photography Pricing Guide: What Not To Do

Many of us photographers tend to set our prices based on assumptions of the photography market. This is the first mistake you can make towards pricing your work. One of the most popular assumptions we make prior to pricing our work is that the photography market is over saturated and to gain clients we first have to have competitive prices. By competitive prices, we usually end up charging dirt cheap and not remotely taking into consideration that we are being cheap to ourselves. Don’t let this assumption consume you and force you to have low prices when you deserve more for your craft.

2. Determine What It Is That You Want

Figuring out what it is exactly what you want can be a significant help when it comes to pricing your photography services confidently. You have to consider if you want the prices you charge to ultimately help fund your career in photography. That is, do you want the money you make from your craft to be pumped into buying things like new camera gear and equipment. This is usually what most photographers use to justify their prices in addition to charging for your time as well.

photography pricing guide

Money made from any job is usually used to fund something else, it’s just for you to determine what it is you want yours to be used for. Use this as motivation to price your work correctly and confidently.

3. Don’t Feel Forced

Try not to feel forced to charge client or individuals for your photography. It is not an existing rule in photography that you have to charge clients once you’re a photographer. If you are truly in photography just for the joy of it and don’t seek to make any financial gain then there is absolutely nothing wrong with that. Don’t get me wrong, it might be a bit different and unusual but nonetheless, you’re doing nothing wrong. The pressure of feeling forced to charge for your craft can sometimes be demotivating to practice your craft itself.

4. Setting Your Prices

When setting your prices there a few things you want to consider. One of those few things is setting a goal as to how much you would like to earn each month from your craft. If you are a freelancer like myself then your craft is your job which means you determine how much you make a month and how much you lose. Setting a goal or rather a salary for yourself each month will help you to not only price your services correctly but motivate you to even sometimes go beyond that goal you’ve set.

photography pricing guide

For example, if you set a goal to earn at least $2000 USD a month from photography then you can determine how many sessions you want to do within that month and price each session accordingly. Now that you’ve set a goal of $2000, you can no split that up into 5 sessions for the month which earns you at least $400 per session. Of course, the freedom to adjust prices and give discounts is always in your hands but this gives you a basic formula to work with confidently.

5. Be Confident In Yourself

You can’t charge clients confidently if you already lack confidence in yourself. If you lack confidence in yourself, it will then translate over into your work and by extension become visible to your clients. To charge confidently you must first have confidence in the work you’re producing and confidence in yourself as a talented photographer. Once you’ve built this confidence, it becomes so much easier when estimating and pricing your projects because you know and understand your worth.

photography pricing guide

I hope this Photography Pricing Guide has served as a great help in learning how to confidently price your work as a beginner or even a professional. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

5 Bad Habits In Photography You Need to Avoid

We all fall victim to having a few bad habits that we fail to see or find so hard to break. Sometimes these bad habits are pretty common amongst a group of friends or even family. Beaking these bad habit can also be one of the most challenges things as they have become so embedded in us that doing it is almost a natural reaction. As photographers, I think we all share a few common bad habits amongst all of us with myself included. In this article, I will be listing some of these bad habits that we all share and shed some light as to how we can break them or just slowly stop making these habits feel natural. So let’s begin and maybe you can identify one of these bad habits that you may have yourself.

1. Refusing To Shoot Conditions That Are Not Perfect

This is a bad habit I developed as a beginner. I would tend to look for ideal situations where I would get the best shots or ideal lighting situations that made me comfortable. I refused to shoot in conditions that were not deemed ideal by me or I would show an obvious sense of discomfort while I’m shooting. This bad habit can gradually hinder your growth as a photographer in many ways. Lighting situations in photography are not always going to be what you want or expected and as a result, you will have to adjust.


Training yourself to only flourish in a specific lighting situation will leave you confused when you are obligated to capture shots at a time that is not ideal to you. It is important you break out of this habit so you can think on your toe and easily adjust to the environment around you. Failure to do this will result in you not only trapping yourself as a photographer but also limiting the variations in your work.

2. Not Shooting Enough

This is a bad habit most of us have whereas we forget to shoot more after we’ve seen a shot we like. Very often we will do a whole photography session with a series of different outfits and different locations however we did not get enough content during this time. This is because of the bad habit we have tells us that we’ve gotten all the shots we need because we’ve captured a handful of good shots. This can prove to be problematic in the future as you miss out on having a wide variation of shots to share with the client as well as you create a habit that will allow you to miss out on important opportunities.


Break this habit by first taking your camera off a single shot and make a habit of shooting continuously. When doing street photography or even portraits, the light around you is always changing as well as the position of your subject which make for a completely new frame. Some of these frames might seem amazing on your LCD screen but there is no telling what you can create once you get home and open up those images in Photoshop or Lightroom. Keep your finger on that shutter and grab as much content as possible so then think about what you can do with those images later.

3. Looking At Your LCD Screen

Speaking of taking a look at the images on your LCD screen brings me to my next point which I’m almost sure a majority of photographers do. I broke into this habit very slowly as a beginner as I would always see other photographers do it and began to do it myself. We have this bad habit of looking at our LCD screen after each shot which can be very time-consuming during a photography session. In addition to it being time-consuming, it can also be very distracting as well and disturb your groove.


When we get focused behind the camera and start to get in our groove of getting some pretty amazing shots, it’s easy to be tempted and wanting to look down at what you’ve captured. However, I urge you to continue shootings as you will have all the time too look at your images after. I think this might just be one of the hardest bad habits to break that I am still currently struggling with so good luck to you my fellow photographers.

4. Deleting In Camera

As much as you possibly can, don’t delete images in the camera while you’re shooting. This is a very costly bad habit that will result in you deleting what could have been an amazing shot. Your LCD screen is not to be used as a tool to judge whether or not the shot is to be deleted but more so for you to simply preview what you’ve captured. Your shots won’t always be perfect but this does not mean that they are useless. Keep all your shots until you are home or at your office and have opened them up on your laptop or desktop. At that point, you should determine if the shot is useful or not.

5. Forgetting To Offload Your Memory Card

The the last but probably most common bag habit with all photographers. After a long day of shooting, its very easy to forget to offload your memory card and dump all the files you’ve taken onto your computer or external hard drive. Forgetting to do this too often will result in a back up of files on your memory cards which can easily get messy and confusing. In addition to that, another worst-case scenario that has happened to me before Is that you end up having a memory card from 2 days ago that is almost full in your camera and not have enough space for new images while you’re on a shoot. This can hinder your whole shoot with you having to either delete some images to make space for new ones or pulling out your laptop and offloading images in front of your client while time goes by. Try to get over this bad habit by offloading your images onto your hard drive the same day you take them and not procrastinate.


I hope to point out some of these bad habits have influenced you to make a few changes yourself in how you shoot or make steps in the right direction. It is always a pleasure sharing these points with you and I hope to see you again in the near future, thank you.

Tips On How To Save Money And Buy Gear Wisely

In many previous articles we have discussed how expensive the art of photography can be and the level of investment it takes over a period of time. Every photographer has a moment in their career where they want to buy almost any and every new shiny lens on the market that has the potential of making their work sharper or just overall improving the quality. This moment in time is something I like to call lens-lust or getting greedy for gear. We often want the things we don’t need and neglect to pay attention to the things we do actually need. It can be hard however to choose the gear you want as everything over a period of time becomes so expensive or costly. In today’s article, we will be discussing the topic of how you can save money and purchase new gear wisely. These simple tips will come in handy throughout the course of your career in photography and also help you to save a few dollars while at it. Photography is an expensive craft that will eventually return your investment as your skills in photography grow and you become more established in whatever genre you decide. Let’s dive into how you can save some money.

1. What are your Actual Needs?

The first step to effectively save money when buying equipment is to first establish a list of things you actually need to better your craft. At some point during your career, you will start to feel limited by the gear you have and see the need to expand in regards to the tools you have. Some of these tools might not be completely necessary so this where the list comes in handy. Do a quick inventory of the gear you have and think to yourself if you’ve used each of them to their full potential before considering to get something similar or an upgraded version with not that much upgrades.


However, if you feel as if you have surpassed the limits of your current equipment then it is time to prioritize. Start to think of the things that are most important and work your way down to the things that can probably wait until your able to comfortably buy them and not break the bank. This process can prove to be very frustrating as you will first start to think that everything on your list is important and you need to get everything at once. I was also one of those photographers until I saw the importance of taking everything in stages and pacing myself in regards to the things I need immediately in comparison to the things that can wait.

2. Come Up With A Budget

Coming up with a budget and sticking by it can sometimes take a lot of will power as we can easily get carried away and not remember that a lot these things can be pretty expensive. You can easily come with a budget by taking into careful consideration what your current revenue or income is and how much of that can be invested in your craft without affecting your day to day or month to month expenses. I often recommend putting some money aside from each shoot into an account or simply putting the cash into a savings jar for future purchases that you wish to get. Doing this will not only help you to appreciate the new gear you’re getting a lot more but also put you into a very good habit of saving towards what you want without putting a dent in your pocket. There’s no denying that camera equipment overall is expensive so if you still don’t see yourself saving enough to get a piece of equipment you need then you can look into alternative options as well that fit into your budget.


Most camera gear retailers understand how costly camera gear can be and seek to provide payment plans for your benefit. It works pretty much the same as if you were to get a new car from the dealership and make monthly payments but this will be significantly less. This is something to consider if it fits in perfectly with your financial status.

3. Rent

The topic budgeting helps to bring me to my next point which renting equipment. Many retailers and camera stores actually give you the convenience of renting anything from camera bodies, lenses and even lighting equipment if you want. This comes in handy when trying to save or even to see if a piece of equipment you were interested in is actually worth it. We can again use the analogy of a car in this situation. You often find individuals going to a dealership to check out the car and test driving it before they decide to make the investment into getting one. The same method can be applied to camera gear.



I recommend renting whatever it is you were interested in for at least 2-3 days, where you will be shooting constantly or have the time to run your test. Running these test will help you to determine if this gear the perfect for you or if it’s not worth the investment you thought it was. Renting gear also comes in handy when you don’t necessarily need the gear for long term use but it will come in handy on a particular shoot day or photography session.

4. Explore Your Options

There are many retailers out there who are looking to sell your camera gear which often works in your advantage. Competitive retailers often mean competitive prices which then lead to discounts on selective items. I encourage you to explore your options in regards to who you buy from as someone else might have the same piece of equipment for a much lesser price. The trick is to save a dollar or two wherever you can so you don’t go over the budget you’ve already established.

I hope these tips will assist you not only now but in the future as well when the time comes to upgrade or buy new gear. Photography is a beautiful but expensive craft that we’ve all grown to appreciate. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

The Perks Of A Photojournalism Career In The 21st Century

I often find it amazing how the art of photography can open so many doors for any individual who’s experienced in the field or looking to become more knowledgeable of it. One of the most important things needed by any individual when making that first step into the field of photography is to first have imagination. As creators, our main power or skill is actually our imagination and how we carry out what we envision. The limits of your imagination are determined only by you and can never be limited by someone else. More and more as years go by we are introduced to new photographers who bring forth a new style of editing and capturing their subjects. This also comes with the steady advancement of the technology that surrounds photography as well and the role it is now playing for experienced and beginner photographers. A career path of photography in this day and age can be very enlightening, difficult, rewarding and so much more. A huge chunk of your career will also be about telling stories through the images you take as well. Photographers are also considered storytellers or even journalist in their own respect. In this article today, we will be combining both of these careers and discussing some of the perks of being a photojournalist in the 21st century. I hope some of the points shared in this article will help to give you an insight into the world of photojournalism and maybe even encourage you to show interest in the field as well. Let’s begin

What is Photojournalism?

Before we dive into all the perks of becoming or being a photojournalist, we have to first understand what it is this career entails or what it is that a photojournalist does. The term photojournalist is actually not used very often and is substituted with just the term photographer. A photojournalist is a photographer who captures images of current events to then relay a story for others to read. So for example, during the time Civil War, photojournalism was at its peak as people were starting to see first-hand images of what it is exactly what was happening during the civil war even if you weren’t anywhere near where it was actually happening. So, in essence, it’s safe to say that the job of a photojournalist is to capture images of significant current events that tell a story to make viewers feel as if they’re experiencing or apart of the moment. These events are not always morbid or violent in nature but can also be political and more as well. Now that we have an understanding of what photojournalism actually is, let’s dive into some of the perks of pursuing a photojournalism career in the 21st century.


1. Travel

The first perk of being a photojournalist in this day and age is the opportunity to travel the world. Thousands of significant events happen around the world on a daily basis which you could then be hired to capture. This gives you a chance not only to capture different people in new geographic places but also the chance to learn more as well. The things you learn as a traveling photojournalist might not always be something great but nonetheless becoming knowledgeable of these things are always beneficial in the long run.

photojournalism career

2. Contributing To History

These days something around with the world is always changing and something is always happening for the first time. Some of these historical events can be filled with joy. For example, the Toronto Raptors winning their first-ever NBA Championship title this year, since they were established in 1995. The streets in the city of Toronto was flooded with over 2 Million people of all races and ethnicities celebrating a historic achievement. As a photojournalist, you capturing images of these moments will withstand the hands of time as it will be a significant day or event to remember not only in Toronto but around the world as well. The potential for your image or your work rather makes its contribution to history as a photojournalist is highly possible with every image you take.

photojournalism career

3. Connecting With People

Connecting with people around the world becomes pretty easy when you’re a photojournalist. You will find yourself meeting new people very often as you attend different invents and interact with those around you that you are taking pictures of. Meeting some of these new people can be enlightening in different ways. Meeting a local gives you the opportunity to understand a little more of what’s happening around you as these people have been experiencing what you are now there to capture. You might also meet someone who can benefit your career in photojournalism by either helping you to improve your work or even recommending you to other news and media outlets as a reliable photojournalist to look out for. The possibilities are endless and you never know what might just happen.

photojournalism career

Thank you for stopping by and giving this article a read. I hope it has opened your eyes as to what the world of photojournalism is all about as well as grabbed your interest in pursuing a career in the field. Until next time, take care.

Useful Tips To Consider When Styling A Photoshoot

Most successful photoshoots or photography session takes some time and planning before the actual day the photos are taken. Of course, sometimes it can be a hassle to make sure everything is ready and set correctly for your client and we wish it could be done at the snap of a finger. It often doesn’t matter what genre of photography you’re involved in as all of them require some form of planning unless you’re just going with the flow. In this article, we will be discussing one of the key elements to think about when planning your photography session. This element pretty is much how you style your session for it to be successful. I will be sharing just a few things to consider or think about when making an effort to style your photoshoot. Let’s begin

1. Location Location Location

One of the first things to consider when trying to successfully style a photo shoot is to think carefully about your location. The location of your session can dictate many things as it regards to the shoot itself. The first thing that is dictated by the location of your shoot is the equipment you will be needing. If you will be using a home studio or have a studio set up at another location then your choice in camera equipment might not have to be a meticulous task. However, if you will be shooting at an outdoor location then you simply won’t be able to walk around with all your lenses and the other things you’d like to use. Make a careful lens selection of about 2-3 lenses that you will more than likely need or use. Minimizing the amount of gear you drag around makes a huge difference especially if you are styling back to back photography sessions.


In addition to selecting the right gear based on your location, you also have to take into account the time of day you plan to be shooting. I’m often a fan of early morning or golden hour times because the sun is not as harsh and you can sometimes find yourself having a nice even light on your subject. Using tools such as your reflector can come in handy but only if you think you’ll absolutely need it. Based on these things you can better determine outfits and poses for your client which we will talk about in a little bit.

2. Your Background

As much as they are never the center of attention in a photo, backgrounds or backdrops are a very important thing to consider when styling your photography session. If you are doing a session in a studio then you want to think about what kind of background or backdrop you would like to have and also how it compliments not only the client but how it will compliment your overall shots as well. Take the time out to think carefully and vision the shots you’d like to capture and how each background might complement or potentially ruin it.


If you will be shooting outdoors then this might be a little tricky as you cannot always determine how your background will look at some outdoor locations. However, if you have done a visit to the location prior to the shoot then you will have a good idea what to expect and style accordingly.

3. A Backup Plan

When styling a successful photo shoot, it is sometimes important to have a backup plan just in case some of the things you planned prior to the shoot, does go as you would’ve hoped. For example, mother nature is not always on our side or working with our timing as photographers so we often have to plan around what mother nature has in store for us. Sadly sometimes she changes her mind and you might end up having some bad weather while trying to shoot outdoors.


It would be disappointing and inconvenient to postpone the shoot for another date so you go to plan b. Your plan B can be somewhere that is indoors that will yield shots that are as equally rewarding as the ones you’ll get outdoors. Having backup plans will save you a lot of time and money as a photographer but more importantly, leave a good impression on your clients in regards to your preparedness.

4. Color Scheme

It all about the details now which involve having the right color scheme for your session. These tones and colors schemes will help to evoke the theme or mood of your session as well as communicate this mood or theme to the viewer ass well. When choosing your color scheme, you want to be a little careful and pay attention to the colors you’re considering. I often recommend looking at colors that compliment each other or just go well together when styled. Not only should these colors compliment each other but they should also compliment the location you’ve already chosen as well.


5. Props

When styling your photoshoot, props can be completely optional. Some prop can be very useful as they add character to your image as well and can sometimes tie perfectly with the overall vision itself. I like to recommend using simple props as anything too outrageous can be very distracting and take away from the image rather than adding to it. Choose your props carefully and think about how they will work with your client and within your overall image.


I hope this article was helpful in guiding you in the right direction as to how you can successful style your own photo shoot or photography session. I look forward to seeing you again and thank you for stopping by.

How Often Should Your Camera Equipment Be Upgraded

Remember as a child, you would go to the store with your parents and see that shiny new toy that you just wanted to have for some reason. You were never exactly sure why you wanted it but for some reason, it caught your attention and you just had to have it. Some of us have fallen victim to this way of thinking even now in our adult or young adult stage in photography. We are often hypnotized by the tools we would like to have due to its shiny and rather tempting appearance but forget the things we need. It is rather easy to fall into this trap as we also begin to think that having shiny new gear will help to improve your photography. This common misconception will end up leading to purchases that were not exactly necessary but done through this same mentality we had as a child. In this article, I will be talking just a bit about how often you should upgrade your camera equipment at a beginner level or even intermediate.

If you are beginner then I will be first speaking about some of the key things to consider before buying new camera equipment to begin your collection. Let’s dive in.

Things To Consider

When buying or thinking about purchasing new or even used camera gear, there are a few fundamental things to think about before checking out. Some of these things are:

1. Your Budget

As we all know, photography is not the cheapest hobby out there and can easily burn a hole in your pocket if you are not careful or shopping smart. You want to have an overall value that you plan to spend on equipment and then try to get the most out of whatever that budget is or even get more than you expected or planned. With this type of mentality, you will eventually start to seek deals and purchase different items according to what you need and not just things you want. There is a clear distinction between what you want and what you need when it comes to photography that you will eventually begin to learn and appreciate.


Having the things you need to improve your craft that you will give you value for your money is very important. It’s always better to have the tools that you will use on a day to day basis than to have something that you might only use once or a few times.

2. Your Style

Take into consideration what it is that you intend to be capturing the most during the start of your photography career. This might be a hard decision to make but it’s one you will have to make nonetheless maybe sooner than you think. Once you’ve determined what exactly your style or genre of photography will be then you can easily determine the equipment you will need and not just the equipment you’d like to have. This will encompass things such as a lens and other accessories that will help in assisting to improve the quality of your work but don’t mistake this for the improvement of your photography. The camera or equipment does not make the photographer. You can still give a photographer minimal equipment and they will still have the potential to produce better results than a next photographer with all the equipment he wants.


Having established the type of photography you would like to dive into, you begin to make a list and research all the important tools you will need to be amazing in whatever you decide.

After taking these two things into consideration then the method or process of purchasing new equipment becomes relatively easier and you will find yourself spending smart on things that will help to propel you forward.

Things To Consider When Upgrading Your Equipment

Upgrading your equipment frequently can be very tempting as manufacturers make annual improvements to earlier models to not only grab the attention of photographers but to also pull into this habit of changing out or upgrading your equipment annual as these new releases come out. Some of us are already in this trap as it regards to our smartphone. Technology giants Apple and Samsung hypnotize every year to upgrade our phones and blind us with all the improvements on the newer models. When in reality some of us don’t even use the improvements we had on the phone prior. Before you consider upgrading your equipment you first think about a few things.

1. Is It Worth It?

This is the first question you should as yourself before putting a dent in your bank account or checking out of your nearest camera store. New and shiny things will always look amazing because they’re supposed to so that they can draw your attention. However, when you finally have this piece of equipment in your hand, all this excitement and bliss can eventually fade as you’ve not actually used that it is you got as much as you thought you would initially. Sadly when you acknowledge this, it might be too late and you’ve fallen victim to a marketing trap.


Don’t get me wrong, this is not to say that new equipment is not worth the investment. This is to encourage you to ask the question if the investment is going to be worth it for you as the photographer.

2. Have You Mastered the Equipment You Have?

This is the next question you should ask yourself after you’ve asked the first one. We are often guilty of not using what we have to its full potential which is something to think about. If you’re confident that you have not yet mastered the equipment you already have to your disposal then you know you should not be investing in more things you won’t potentially master as well. If you are confident however that you have indeed mastered you have mastered the tools you have at hand then maybe it might just be time to step it up.


In conclusion, how much you should upgrade your gear can solely be dependent on you as a photographer. I hope these points have been helpful in guiding you in the right direction and I look forward to seeing you again.

Secrets Of Mom And Baby Studio Photography

Photographing newborns can be both such a challenging but rewarding task as a photographer. In most cases, it is rewarding with still a few challenges in there. Capturing amazing moments between a mother and her child is not only magical but also gives you the opportunity experience that moment of pure loving and bonding between them both. In today’s article, we will be talking about a few secrets that could be very useful when conducting an indoor studio session between a mother and her newborn. Some of these secrets can be subjected to minor changes depending on your studio environment or personal preference of your client. I hope this combined list of secrets will come in handy on your next mother & newborn studio session, let’s begin.

1. Keep The Room Warm

One of the first secrets to doing successful mom and baby studio session is to make sure that the environment is perfect for the child. Thankfully you will be conducting your session in a studio which should be a controlled space enough for you to adjust the temperature in the room. Newborns are sensitive to almost everything during those early stages and temperature is definitely one of them. They usually have difficulty regulating their own body temperature so it’s always best to keep the space warm. If you are not able to adjust the temperature in the room then it’s always helpful to have a few clean and warm blankets around just in case.

baby studio photography

Mom’s will usually bring a warm blanket that already belongs to the child but you can never be too prepared. Creating a warm and comfortable space will allow the newborn to sleep soundly, making it a lot easier for you and the mom to maneuver various positions and styles carefully during the shoot. You can usually tell when its warm enough when you or the mother start to sweat a little. That will prove as a clear indication that it’s perfect for the baby.

2. Scheduling

Timing is everything and in this case, you and the mother would have to work around the schedule of the newborn. Babys tend to have this unwritten schedule that you eventually learn as you go when you’re a parent. Based on this unwritten schedule, you can usually approximate when is a good time for naps, feed, and a bath, etc. Deviating from this schedule can sometimes result in a baby becoming miserable or uneasy which is what you don’t want during the session. Based on my experience, usually, the best time for these sessions are early in the morning. Most newborns sleep more soundly around this time of day especially if they were up earlier prior. This little secret will help to dictate a smooth day of shooting with a peaceful baby and a relaxed mother.

baby studio photography

Naturally, mothers tend to worry about their children in regards to if they’re okay and if they need anything. You want to dispell this worry as much as possible so it does not show in your images. A happy and relaxed baby will always equal a relaxed mom.

3. Talk With The Mother

Another secret I would like to share with photographers for mom and baby studio sessions is to take the time out to speak with the mother and see what it is she would like to achieve from this session apart from a few beautiful pictures. Communication is always key and can help you in achieving exactly what it is your client wanted or was looking for. Ask a few questions regarding her newborn as well just to initiate a good relationship and line of communication. Doing this will also help the mother in feeling more comfortable, confident and relaxed about the session.

baby studio photography

Newborns are very receptive to energy and will react to what they feel is happening around them. Therefore if their mother is nervous or unsettled then the newborn themselves will also be very unsettled.

4. Soothing Sounds

Another secret that has proven helpful during mom and baby studio photography is having soothing music play throughout the session. Research has shown that when in the womb, babies endure a lot of noise. Having endured this noise for months, once they’re born, hearing something similar actually helps them to relax or sleep soundly.


If you have speakers in your studio then I recommend researching some soothing sounds and have them play throughout the session. I have noticed that this doesn’t only help the baby to relax but helps the mother as well. Playing soothing sounds will help to solidify a smooth and peaceful photography session with a mother and her newborn.

5. Take Your Time

Photography moms and their newborns can be time-consuming sometimes so be sure to plan accordingly. If you’re lucky then it might not take as long as you anticipated but in most cases, it’s a few hours for me. It will take time to first get the newborn fed and comfortable and then make the mother comfortable as well so don’t be in a rush when conducting a session like this. This secret will make you appreciate the little details by also making you aware of them.


I hope some of these secrets have been helpful in successfully completing a mom and baby studio photography session of your own. Until next time, thank you so much for stopping by!

Common Drone Photography Mistakes You Can Avoid

Drone photography has somewhat become an epidemic amongst creatives as it becomes more affordable and lucrative in today’s industry. The popularity with drones grew more and more as manufacturers started to improve their line of products by making an adjustment to distance, video quality and also image quality. However, with all these improvements we sometimes still end up making a few simple mistakes. This article will speak to some of those mistakes that are commonly made by beginners and sometimes even professionals. Most of if not all of these mistakes can be easily corrected so let’s get into it.

1. Composition

One of the first mistakes commonly made in drone photography that I also once did was having very poor or boring composition. As photographers who use hand-held cameras, it is kinda easy to be a bit thrown off or rather out of your element when composing a shot on a drone. There is often added pressure as your flight time may be very limited as well as the paranoia of crashing into anything and losing or end up damaging your drone. However, this is no excuse for a boring composition.

drone photography

I know many of us upon getting a new drone to become very excited and want to just about capture anything from in the air but I urge you to put more thought into what you’re capturing. Take a look at your frame and consider if the elements within it are worth capturing or if they add no creative value to the shot itself.

2. Bad Timing

Timing is very important when it comes to drone photography and can often dictate whether or not you will be wasting your time putting your drone in the air. Take into consideration the position of the sun as it relates to the time of day. Shooting in the harsh sun can often create harsh shadows which often result in drone shots that are not very appealing or might be a headache to correct during post-production.
I often recommend capturing drone images during two times of the day.

drone photography

These two periods of the day are sunrise and sunset. Flying your drone to capture images during this time of the day will yield rewarding results with even and soft light that is pleasing to the eye. Of course, this might not be the case for everyone depending on where you are trying to fly your drone as the lighting situations might be a bit different but nonetheless try to avoid shooting in harsh lighting situations.

3. Horrible Weather

Speaking of bad timing brings us to our next point of shooting in bad weather. While it is obviously not recommended that you fly your drone to capture shots while it’s raining, it is also pointless to capture shots during dull weather. Dull weather will yield dull results even in the best locations.

drone photography

If you want to create amazing drone images at amazing locations then invest a little more time into planning and taking a look at your weather app or research the forecast from different outlets to assure you will get the type of whether you need to truly capture your location to the best of your potential.

4. Skewed Horizon

This is probably one of the most common mistakes made by pretty much anyone some time. We end up with a horizon that is not particularly straight and kinda throws off your whole image. By extension, this mistake can also make your shot look pretty amateur. However, there is a simple fix to this such as check your horizon before taking your shot or simply correct it during post-production.

5. Research

It’s easy to not use your drone or your equipment to its full potential when you are not aware of what it’s potential actually is. Most of us get caught up in the moment of actually owning a drone and being able to do simple functions to get good aerial shots but that’s it. We don’t invest enough time into learning a little more about the features and tricks all piled up into this machine. Not being aware of these things can easily lead to lost opportunities.

drone photography

This is whereas we have these feature to our disposal to use in different scenarios but we simply did not try to learn about them. To solve this, I recommend simply reading a few blog post here and there to be educated on things you were not exactly sure about. You could also use youtube to your advantage and get some insight as to how other well-known photographers or videographers use their drone to achieve different styles or images in drone photography.

I hope this article has served as being helpful in acknowledging some of this minor but also significant mistakes made in our drone photography. As creatives, we are not perfect and can always improve our work in different ways. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

4 Tips On How To Create Cinematic Photos

As platforms such as Netflix become more popular through providing viewers with compelling cinematography as well as the production of other award-winning movies released in the past 5 years we’ve begun to appreciate the artistic qualities behind these movies or videos a lot more. Through this appreciation, we develop a desire to replicate some of these moods, tones or even compositions as seen in the movie. Of course, we are not all filmmakers or videographers but for those of you who are photographers like myself, I have figured out a few tips that will come in handy when trying to replicate these scenes through our images.

This article will aim to provide some very simple but useful tips in trying to create cinematic images. For some of you who are already upcoming filmmakers or even videographers, some of these tips may already be a given for you. However for the beginners who are trying to achieve this cinematic effect through their images, here is how you can start.


1. Rewatch Your Favorite Movies

The first tip towards creating cinematic photos is not reaching for your camera but rather to get a bowl of popcorn with probably something to drink and be prepared to watch some movies. This might seem a bit odd but the reason for this is to help you acknowledge what it was exactly that compelled you to want to recreate a particular scene through your images or what are the elements within that scene that made it grab your attention. Establishing some of the cinematic scenes in our favorite movies will also help us to develop a greater appreciation in regards to the creative thought and effort invested.


If you don’t have a movie in particular that speaks to cinematic inspiration then you can always do some research. Some of my favorite movies to date were not found through advertisements or what’s popular on social media but rather through research on award-winning movies and what made that movie deserving of an award. Some of the best movies with great cinematography are often not popular anyway, but rather end up fading under new releases that are happening so frequently. Broaden your horizons and give different genres a try while still making notes of the key things you liked in each film you watched.

2. Lens

After you have successfully watched your batch of inspiring movies to find cinematic inspiration, the next step is to determine which piece of glass is most appropriate to mount onto the front of your camera. Most films or movies are not shot with a zoom lens but rather with a prime or fixed lens. If you were to take a look into the gear of a filmmaker or someone who produces great video content then you would notice this trend. The reason for this is that prime or fixed lenses help to provide a sharper video quality as well as creating buttery smooth bokeh for stunning isolation.


However, don’t feel as if you’re limited to only using prime lenses as we are doing photography and not film. Nonetheless, it is highly recommended that you use a prime lens when trying to create cinematic images. The most popular prime lens amongst photographers is of course what some of us call the “nifty fifty” which is your 50mm. This lens is often the first one purchased by beginners in photography and used very often by professionals as well. Another lens that can be deemed very popular is the 35mm. Both of these serve their individual purpose when being used in the field. Your 35mm lens can be very useful if trying to capture a frame up close and the 50mm can be used for achieving great isolation and visually pleasing background blur. Generally, you may find yourself using the 50mm a lot more than your 35mm but both of these lenses help to create a great cinematic effect at a very reasonable cost.

3. Subject Isolation

A common practice used by filmmakers is blurring out the background just enough for the audience to pay attention to a particular subject or person of importance within the frame. The practice can also be transitioned over into photography as well. Subject isolation helps the subject in demanding the attention of your viewer and can be done very easily. Depending on how much isolation you are looking to achieve in your image, you can do a few simple things.

One of the first things I usually do is adjust my aperture to the lowest value possible at f/1.8 or f/2.8 and then adjust my other settings such as ISO and shutter speed to help compensate for all the light I will be letting in. This usually helps to produce some beautiful cinematic shots with my 50mm f/1.8. Another way of achieving subject isolation is to also be considered close to your subject enough that your background becomes out of focus.


However, you don’t always have to create a blurred background or exercise subject isolation in all your shots as older cinematic films often used smaller apertures which got their subject perfectly sharp but blurred the other elements in the frame just enough to not be distracting to the viewer.

4. Color Grading

A key element in creating great cinematic shots is essentially how these shots are edited. Color grading can help to dictate the mood or theme of your shot which ultimately helps to tell a story or convey a message through the image itself.


Take the time to play around with things such as hues, saturation, and tones as it helps to establish the appearance of a film. Your temperature settings can also help to establish the mood of your photo as well but try to be careful with this as it can ruin your shot.

Advantages Of Low Angle Photography You Should Know

In photography, there are many things that help play a key role to determine how good or how great your image is. Two of these key things are your perspective and your composition. As I have said many times before, the composition or perspective of your image can help to make it better or break it into something you are not particularly proud of. In this article, we will be talking a little about a mixture of both in regards to shooting at a low angle. To some of you, this may sound weird but I do encourage you to give it a try first. As photographers, we’ve easily fallen into a habit of shooting the subject at our eye level or just bending our knees a little bit to get low. In my case, I have to bend my knees very often due to my height. It’s safe to say being 6’4 has its pros and cons as well. However, have you ever thought of maybe getting a little bit lower and aiming upwards or simply capturing shots from a very low angle? If not, here are some simple tips and advantages of capturing a subject from a low angle.

1. Diversity

At some point, images can become very predictable or rather boring to viewers if there is no change in perspective or composition. Shooting from a low angle will help to bring forth some of the diversity needed in an album or if you’re working on your portfolio. This will show that you are capable of doing whatever is needed to make sure you capture the most interesting angle of your subject. It will also help to keep your viewers wondering as to how you even got that shot. Just like macro photography, there are often very interesting things to capture that are not at your eye level.

low angle photography

2. Make Subject More Interesting

Many subjects are interesting without having to put much effort into making them look interesting but what if you tried? Shooting subjects from a lower angle sometimes easily help to make them look even twice as interesting than they already were. This is how perspective and composition can help to shape your subject into something else within your frame that helps to make them that much more appealing.
Remember as a child, you would have to look up at everything that was bigger than you.

low angle photography

This was usually almost everything in your household or everyone when you went out with your parents or parent but nonetheless, your eyes glistened with interest. Everything looked so big and interesting that you either wanted to touch or just learn more about it. That same feeling of interest can be recreated by simply getting a little lower and aiming up to your subject.

3. Better Background

Getting low can often help to provide you with a more visually pleasing or better background for your subject. Many times I have run into the issue where my subject is perfect where it is but for some reason my background is giving me a problem. When this happens, I make it a habit to get a little lower and see how my background plays out from a different perspective. It usually helps very well depending on the setting your in or the subject you’re shooting.

low angle photography

Getting low can particularly help in street photography with those busy backgrounds especially in the city. Use the towering buildings to your advantage to help steer focus on your subject and keep your background interesting but not too interesting to distract the viewer from your subject.

4. Heroic Look

Shooting from a low angle also helps to evoke a very heroic or superior look on your subject. This is often used by sports photographers, more popularly in basketball. If you take a look at the position of most photographers during a basketball game they’re either sitting on the floor or laying on their stomachs to get their shot. This is because they want their subject to look superior or heroic as well to get more details to make their shots more interesting. Photographers in Soccer do this as well and across most sports, you will find that this habit, in particular, is pretty common.

5. Playing With Lines

Low Angles in photography usually enable you to use lines in the composition of your image. Using lines in photography is a very powerful technique in composition and can actually help your image to stand out a lot more. There is something visually appealing about capturing lines parallel to each other in a frame that can easily be achieved by just getting a little lower than usual.

It’s been a huge pleasure sharing with you how low angle photography can benefit you as a photographer and add more diversity to your work. It is always a pleasure sharing these useful tips with you and I look forward to doing so again.

15 Photography Facts A Photographer Should Know

The field of photography encompasses so many beautiful details and past events that hold a significant place in its history. Surprisingly, there are many photographers who are still unaware of some of these amazing photography facts that helped to shape the way we do photography today. In this article, I have prepared at least 15 of these facts to share with you to give an insight as to how the world of photography was shaped by them and why it is you should know them as a photographer yourself. After learning some of these random but important facts, I encourage you to share them with another photographer as I am with you through this article. Let’s begin

1. The Most Viewed Photograph

A photograph by the name of “Bliss” is known to be one of the most viewed photographs in the world. Many of you may not know it by name but if you’re a 90’s child like me then you have seen it at some point during your childhood or almost every day. The photograph was set as the default wallpaper for Windows XP. The photograph was taken in 1996 which was long before the technology giants launched the Windows XP software. The photographer who captures this image is known as Charles O’Rear. He ventured to California, more specifically the Sonoma County and created an image that could easily be classified as a staple in photography. It has been speculated over the years that the image was digitally manipulated but O’Rear has stated that it never was. The image was taken on a medium format camera and is currently almost impossible to accurately recreate. Over the years the landscape has developed and gone through significant change.

2. What Photography Means

Many of us today have dedicated our lives to have a career in the field of photography but do we actually know what photography means? Many of us can share what photography means to us individually but in the literal sense, how much do we know?
The word photography is of Greek origin and can be split into two words which are ‘photos’ and ‘graphe’. These words both essentially mean ‘drawing with light’. This meaning is very powerful as it gives a more in-depth understanding as to what it is we are doing as photographers.

3. No Smiles In Old Photos

Portrait photos that were taken during a time when photography was still in its infancy stages all share a common characteristic. This common characteristic is that almost none the individuals in these photos smiled. Everyone had to hold a straight face and look at the camera simply because they had to stay still enough to get a good photograph. Photography was still in its early stages and was not as technologically advanced as we are now. Therefore, many of the photographers back then had endured ridiculously long exposure which could take a few hours. With that said, we can now understand why everyone looked so miserable or unhappy.


old photos

4. A Costly Photograph

Photography itself is a very expensive career path or field to be involved in but it does have it’s rewards which make each investment worth it. Each photograph we take has the potential to be something a lot bigger or more popular than we imagined or anticipated. I’m pretty sure this is what Andreas Gursky experienced when he created the Rhien II. This photograph was sold for an estimated 4.3 million dollars back in the year 2011. I know many of us like myself would currently hope to achieve even half of that from one photograph.

5. Digital Photography Saved Lives

The advancement of photography into the digital ages has been beneficial to photographers in many ways more than one. Before digital photography came to fruition, photographs had to be developed by the photographers in a dark room. To develop these photographs took a lot of time and some chemicals that were actually harmful to the photographers themselves. Long exposure to these chemicals such as silver nitrate, mercury and others would result in fatal illnesses or even madness as some would say. Developing photographs in a dark room is still done today but not nearly as often as it was.

6. The Inventor Of Photography

The person who’s responsible for this beautiful craft we have today was actually not known for it but rather something completely different. Joseph Nicephore Niepce took the first successful photograph in 1816, which had an exposure time of about 8 hours but was still not completely clear. During his lifetime he was not recognized for his revolutionary work in photography but rather his other skills in building propellers for boats.

7. Angles

This is something I have experienced myself having been both behind and in front of the camera, that the left side of our faces tends to photograph better than the right side. Throughout my career, I have done a lot of portraits sessions and it has been proven that most people actually favor their left side as opposed to their right. Research has suggested that the left side of our face communicates more intensity of emotions which has been found more aesthetically pleasing.


8. 35mm Film

The popular 35mm film format in still photography that we praise today was actually introduced by photography manufacturer giants Leica in 1925. This 35mm film format became a key factor in how we select our cameras today as it helps to define a crop sensor and full-frame cameras in the digital age.

9. Dodge & Burn

The popular tool used in photoshop were actual techniques that were used in a darkroom to lighten, darken or saturate images. It’s from these old techniques that some of thee tools in the digital age are named.

10. Genres Of Photography

There are an estimated 80 genres of photography and at least 10 sub-genres. The common photographer like myself is often only aware of a small fraction of these genres.

11. Black and White Photography

The age of strictly black and white photos lasted up until the 1930’s when color was introduced. Today, black and white photography is still popular and is deemed the best way to go if you are trying to tell stories with your images or evoke intense emotion. Colors can sometimes be very distracting and take away from powerful images.

12. Fashion Photography

The age of fashion photography was actually invented by the French. In some sense, this is not surprising as the French share a long history in the field of fashion itself. Actually, the worlds first fashion magazine was called “Le Mode Practique”.

13. Aerial Photography

Speaking of the French. Aerial photography was born after a French inventor took a picture of Paris from a hot air balloon. I’m sure he would marvel in the fact that we can now send drones into the sky to capture high-quality images and videos while being safe on the ground.

14. Printed Photos

It has been statistically researched and proven that only 2 out of 10 photos taken with a digital camera today will be printed on paper.

15. Post Mortem Photography

As horrible as it may sound, during the 1800s, taking pictures of dead bodies was one of the most popular subjects for photographers in that era. Back in those days, it was primarily famous or relatively rich people that were afforded the luxury of being photographed. If you were a regular person, then your best chance at being photographed was after your death.

I hope some of these facts have been eye-opening for you and gave you the opportunity to learn something new. I am always happy to share and hope to see you again very soon. Thank you for stopping by!

A Quick Guide to Going With The Flow In Photography

As individuals, there are many times where we don’t allow ourselves to relax and enjoy what it is we have to go on in front of us and also around us. We get so easily trapped into a routine or a schedule that we have on a day to day basis that we forget to show appreciation for the little things. The field or career of photography can become very hectic and time-consuming as in this day and age it is a very lucrative industry. There are millions of creative individuals like you and myself picking up a camera every day just to create or to complete a project to get paid so that they can buy more equipment or just cover their bills on a monthly basis.

In this article, I aim to give you a few tips on how you can take a break and just go with the flow within your craft. These tips are not only subjected to photographers but can also come in handy for videographers as well. Going with the flow basically means, you have no set objective or motive as to what it’s you want to capture but you will be capturing whatever it is that catches your eye. Going with the flow in photography has proven to be very rewarding for me especially during my travels where I find myself just shooting for fun and not for a particular reason. With that said, let’s dive into a few ways as to how you can go with the flow in photography.

1. Don’t Plan

My first word of advice to you when trying to go with the flow is to not plan. This might seem very contradictory to what I’ve said in the previous article where I stressed the importance of being prepared and planning. However, there is a reason I recommend not planning when trying to go with the flow in your photography. When you make a preconceived plan in your head before going out to shoot, you subconsciously try to stick to that plan or stay as close as possible to that plan you already have.


This can tend to limit your creativity and keep you confined or rather trap yourself to shoot in a particular way. At this point, you’re no longer going with the flow but more so trying to complete an objective or plan you’ve already created for yourself. Don’t think about it, just go out and let your passion for photography speak for itself and you will be amazed at what you come up with.

2. No Camera Bag

If possible I also recommend leaving your camera bag at home. This can be subjective to where it is you live or where it is you intend on going but nonetheless if possible, just leave it. There’s often a stigma attached to walking around with a camera bag and that stigma is also associated with you having a mission or set plan to capture something. Not walking around with a camera bag not only gives you the freedom to move around without any weight on your back but it also challenges you as a photographer as well. Walking with a camera bag gives you access to all this extra equipment that you will eventually be tempted to use once you’re out.


With the bag not there, you are forced to use whatever you have to your disposal and make it work the best for you. This will help to sharpen your skills as a photographer but also bring a humble feeling to reminded you what it is like to not have all the equipment you now have. Some will say that it also teaches you to appreciate the other lenses you have and test the limit on what it is you’ll be using in the field. The extra weight from your camera bag will do nothing but slow you down so don’t even think about it. Challenge yourself and develop a deeper connection with your passion.

3. Don’t Be Afraid

Try not to be fearful when exploring and following wherever your passion takes you. The thrill of going with the flow is to explore different genres of photography, explore new locations and also explore where your passion will lead you. Keep an open mind and don’t be too fearful of where it is you’re going. If going with the flow for you is to visit a city and do some street shots then, by all means, go ahead but don’t be afraid to capture strangers or ask for permission to take a shot that caught your eye.


Taking the time out to go with the flow as a creative can be as therapeutic as listening to soothing music or going on a cruise. It feels so effortless and reminds you why it is you fell in love with the craft in the first place. I hope this article has inspired you to get out there and go with the flow so you can remember what it is that made you love photography in the first place. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

Tips For Shooting Overcast Portraits

Photographers like myself sometimes play a constant gamble with the weather as we can never be completely sure what to expect. Of course, we try our best with keeping up on the weather channel or even constantly checking the apps on our phones but mother nature is her own boss and can sometimes be very unpredictable. This often makes our job difficult as a photographer or even a videographer as it becomes a cat and mouse game to decide on a particular day with hopes for good weather. Sometimes the days work out in our favor and other times it does the complete opposite, leaving us having to reschedule a shoot of having it completely postponed. However, we don’t always have the time in our schedule as the photographer and often find that the client themselves also don’t have the time to reschedule a shoot so find ourselves having to work with mother natures plans. In this article, I will be sharing just a few tips on how you can effectively shoot portraits in overcast weather and work with mother natures plans.

1. Be Mindful Of The Sky

When shooting cloudy day portraits in overcast weather it can be a tricky decision to make if you want the sky in your image or not. Overcast skies are not always the most appealing thing to have in your photo but this also depends on the mood or theme of the images you’re taking. For example, if you intend to edit the set of images in pure black and white then having a slightly overcast sky in your image shouldn’t really matter unless you’re picky and don’t particularly like how it looks.

overcast portrait

If you’re shooting in color however and not looking to have too much of a dark or disturbing sky in your image then I advise you compose your shot with as little of the sky in it as possible.

2. Use A Reflector

Using a reflector on an overcast day can definitely come in handy when you need to bounce some light on to your subject. Not because it’s overcast means there is no light at all to bounce. If you position your subject or talent properly then you can easily and successfully bounce whatever light there is unto them to help cast out too many shadows. Shooting in overcast condition can easily produce a lot of shadows on your subject which is not always bad but it’s also something you don’t always want to have to fix in post. Carrying a reflector around on your sessions that are overcast can prove very helpful and might just help you in a rough time.

3. Shoot A Little Underexposed

An overcast sky is mother nature basically creating a huge softbox for you so there is no direct harsh light shining onto your subject. What I usually recommend is shooting just a little underexposed so you have the freedom to play with your shadows and highlights but also your colors and contrast. This huge softbox gives you the ability to easily enhance the colors in your image and make them even richer while still maintaining some very smooth and pleasing shadows as well. Shooting underexposed will give you the freedom to play with many essential things during your editing process.

overcast portrait

4. Shoot RAW

I’m confident that beginners have heard this enough and professionals like myself already know the importance of shooting raw but I would just like to remind you again. The importance of shooting RAW during a cloudy day portrait session in overcast weather will always work to your advantage. With the potential of having so many shadows and a considerate amount of contrast in your image, you need to have the freedom to effectively play around with key elements in your photo without losing the quality in your image.

5. Aperture

Shooting with a wide open aperture can help to produce a very beautiful bokeh or shallow depth of field around your subject. This looks beautiful especially in overcast settings where you want to bring in as much light into your camera as possible while at the same time isolating your subject. Creating a shallow depth of field will help to make your subject stand out in the frame more and demand the attention of the viewer.

overcast portrait

6. Select One Focal Point

Try to not have your camera decide on its own focal point but rather select one yourself and make sure it is composed properly on your subject. Sometimes our camera will get it right and select the right point of focus but in the event of an overcast session, it is best you select a focal point yourself. This will assure you of a very well focused subject as well as capturing key details in your cloudy day portrait as well.

Shooting overcast portraits can sometimes be very fun and easy due to the conditions around us. It’s safe to say that mother nature can decide correctly on what it is we need and not exactly what it is we want. I hope this article has been a huge help to your next portrait session and thank you for stopping by.

The Importance Of Connecting With Your Talent as a Photographer

Photography is often more than just capturing a couple cool or stunning photos but rather building a connection with the things or people you’re capturing. Many of us only see photography for its face value and not dig deeper to appreciate the gems within it and how it can benefit us in many other ways. Today we will be digging into one of those gems which are understanding why it is important to form or establish a connection with your subject before or during the time you’re capturing them. I will also be sharing some of the key things you can do to help establish a connection with your subject to yield very rewarding results. Let’s dive in.

1. Evoking Emotion

Connecting with your subject can be a huge boost in trying to evoke emotion or passion through your image. Many photos taken by great photographers are composed and timed perfectly but when you take a look and observe the emotions being evoked by their subject, you sometimes get nothing.


Once you’ve established a connection, the task of showing these emotions become a lot easier as you and the subject or talent now have a clear understanding of each other and what it is you guys are trying to create. This will help to create much more powerful shots and give your viewer the ability to see and probably understand what was going through the mind of the talent you were capturing or rather what emotion they were trying to evoke.

2. Comfort

Establishing a connection can easily help your subject to feel a lot more comfortable when conducting a shoot with you. Sometimes as photographers we can be so straight to the point in getting our camera out and preparing to get a session done that we don’t take the time out to speak with the talent or rather spend some time with them a bit more. One of the keys to capturing definitive images of someone or even something is to understand their reason for wanting to be in front of the camera.


Take the time out to talk to your talents a little bit more to understand a few things about them as a person and what it is they look forward to achieving from the session. This will help to guide your style of shooting in a path that is more agreeable with what your talent expects or even better. Connections can serve as a very useful creative tool when working with different talents and it is important you that you use these connections to your advantage.

3. Simpler Edits

Having an understanding of your talent can also lead to providing simple but meaningful edits. As photographers, we must admit that we can sometimes get very carried away with some of the images we’re editing during our post-production process. Having a clear understanding of what your talent is looking to evoke through how they want the image to feel can also help to guide the editing process. Many will prefer a simpler way of editing so the image is not ruined or distracted by the edits but rather they both compliment each other and work perfectly. Connections with your talents can run very deep through the veins of your images and help to give your shots the ability to speak for themselves without explanation from you or the talent.

4. Adds Meaning

As I mentioned earlier, there are many times were even photographers like myself may capture a subject or a talent simply because they look cool or we thought the frame would make for a cool shot. This leaves no particular meaning behind the images aside from the fact that we thought it was a good shot. There completely nothing wrong with this and it is perfectly normal to have this thought as a photographer but once you have a connection with your talent or subject, that all changes. Your images are no longer meaningless but now rather filled with meaning. You can now tell a story behind every shot, sharing every little detail as to what inspired it. Images with a pure meaning will always seem to get better feedback from viewers than those that were a bit meaningless. For some reason, it is not difficult to differentiate the two.


Before you even take your camera out, think about what it is you’re looking to capture from this photography session and also try to understand what it is your talent is looking to achieve from this photography session as well. Establishing a connection with your subject or talent is definitely something that is worth the effort as it will yield very rewarding results. You will gradually understand the huge difference between shooting a subject or talent without meaning as opposed to having a meaningful photography session. I hope these points have served as a huge help in showing you the importance of having a connection with your talent. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

Pros And Cons Of Volunteering Your Photography Services For Free

In a creative industry like photography, we all have to, unfortunately, start from somewhere. This starting point can yield many rewards and lessons as you go along. Experience is something money cannot buy and take the time out to volunteer your skills for free as a photographer can be both beneficial and an issue in your career in the field of photography. The experience you will gain from working on some projects or with others for free will eventually come in handy in the long-run and be an asset to some of your future high paying jobs. In this article, I will be listing some of the pros and cons that you might encounter as a beginner or even a professional when volunteering your services for free. Let’s get into it.


1. Personal Growth

Through volunteering your skills or gift for free you will eventually end up meeting and interacting with new people and seeing a lot of new faces. Many of these people will appreciate and compliment your creative gift and even encourage you to continue on the path you’re on. Through these interactions, you will see personal growth in how you communicate and treat others in many different settings. You will also develop a better relationship with your passion for photography as you begin to see how it can benefit others and put a smile on the face of people you’re meeting for the first time.


2. Recognizing You Have A Gift

With doing free work, comes self-recognition. You begin to consider your skills as a gift and not just something to make some money. Don’t get me wrong, the money that can be made from offering photography services is indeed great but through working for free you will realize that there is more to the craft than just the financial rewards. When working for free, it shouldn’t feel like you’re actually working but rather just enjoying what your passion is.

As a photographer, you have a gift of capturing moments at the right second so these moments can then be shared with others as a memory of the time spent or rather just a memory of that moment in time. Your gift is a gift to others and through volunteering your services, you will begin to notice that as well.

3. Exploring Something New

Offering free work can sometimes bring about some new experiences. Many individuals may not particularly have actual money to pay you but they can offer you things that money won’t necessarily be able to buy. Exploring and having these new experiences can be a huge asset to you as a photographer as you are now capable of documenting that may never happen again. Through shooting with some selective people for free during my photography career, I can honestly say that I have met and worked with individuals that I never thought I would actually have the chance to meet. I have also been in places that I have never even dreamed about visiting as well just through my work and having a passion for the art of photography.


4. Potentially Lead To Paid Work

In most cases, shooting for free can lead to you gaining more clients who will actually pay you for the work you’ve done. Many times, people like to see a sample of what it is you can actually produce before they decide to pay you for your work. This can be very discouraging at times but this is how it often goes especially when you’re a beginner. As a beginner, not many people will have faith in what you’re capable of because they still think you have so much to learn. In most cases this is true, however, don’t let this thought get into your head and lead to self-doubt. Take this chance to prove yourself and show what it is exactly you can do with your gift.


1. Exposure

This is probably one of the worse cons once you’ve done a few shoots for free. Sadly, people tend to get pretty spoilt and assume that because you did a few shoots for free, that means you’ll shoot for anyone free who can give you some exposure. I urge you to not fall for this trap as the exposure being offered to you, won’t always help you. Choose very wisely who it is you except exposure from as payment. Many people will come to you offering things such as the huge fan base they have or what they are capable of. During my years of doing photography, I can honestly say that exposure has never paid for my equipment but rather gained me a few new followers on Instagram or my other social media platforms.


2. Work Is Devalued

Your work will sometime be devalued by those who you’ve worked with for free. Because they have already gotten accustomed to getting their photos taken at no cost at all, they will be shocked and probably even disappointed when you quote them a price for what they want to get done. This can sometimes be complicated and even awkward especially if the person is a friend or family member. However, it does open your eyes a bit as you begin to see who values your work enough to pay for it as opposed to those who think your work should be free for them and them alone.

3. Burn Yourself Out

You will encounter individuals who will take you for advantage and not consider that you’re providing a free service. You may find yourself being treated by someone as if they’re paying you through giving you orders and making demands from you as the photographer. This can also be awkward as well because you don’t want to be rude but at the same time you’re burning yourself out not only creatively but also physically for something you might not see any rewards from. Use your creative and physical energy very wisely and try not to burn yourself out too much if you notice that it is not worth it or you are not pleased with the treatment received.


I hope these points have been a great help in having you see both sides as it regards to providing your services for free. It’s always a pleasure sharing with you and I look forward to seeing you again very soon.

How To Find The Perfect Photography Assistant

It doesn’t matter if you’re an experienced professional photographer or even a new beginner, we all eventually need some help. There are many things or rather projects in photography that can sometimes simply not be completed alone. We all eventually need a helping hand, whether it be from a friend or even better, your own assistant. Having the right assistant as a photographer can be very important as you might just end up having to watch over someone rather than them giving you the help you need. In this article, we will be discussing very quickly some tips as to how you can find the perfect photography assistant. Let’s begin

1. Enthusiastic

The first thing to look out for when choosing a photography assistant is to get someone that is as enthusiastic about your craft as you are or even more. Having an enthusiastic assistant will not only help you to actually be inspired by their enthusiasm but also excited to teach them new things as well.

photography assistant

You never really understand or notice how talented or skilled you are until you’re teaching someone who’s eager to learn from you. This can be a very humbling experience that also motivates you to be better and do better than you already are. Enthusiasm helps fuel success and success helps to fuel even more success so this is the first thing to look out for when considering an individual to be your assistant.

2. Polite

Nobody generally likes a rude person or to have someone even remotely impolite around so this is the second to look out for when considering someone to be your assistant. Always keep in mind that It is your photography brand or company that is being represented by someone else. Failure for the person to act appropriately around a client won’t only result in you as the lead photographer looking bad but your company or brand as well. With that said, it’s safe to say you should choose very carefully who it is you’d like to represent your brand on your behalf or be a representation of you.

photography assistant

3. Easy To Get Along With

As individuals, we will always have our difference in opinions or how it is we think or feel about something but this does not make us a bad person. You don’t want an assistant to tell you yes all the time but rather an assistant that can share their opinion as well and help you to see things from another perspective. There’s a saying that goes “Two minds are always better than one” and it applies perfectly here. Try to never make the mistake and assume that your assistant having a difference in opinion from you is defiant but rather respect their opinion as you would like yours to be respected as well.

Having a certain chemistry or bond with your assistant is important to have moving forward. Therefore it is great to have someone to bounce ideas off of as well as share their ideas with you as well to help improve your craft and by extension improve your business as well.

4. Hardworking

This should easily go without saying that you should look out for an assistant that is as hardworking as you are. Contrary to popular belief, photography can be a very hectic and rather exhausting job because you’re on your feet for an extended period of time. Having someone whos hard working and look forward to getting the job done is definitely something to consider when looking at your options of prospective assistants. If you are very used to working under high-pressure situations without dropping the ball then your assistant should be capable of doing the same or even better so you both don’t fall off your game but rather get what you need to get done.

photography assistant

5. Knowledgeable

Last but not least having or finding an assistant that is knowledgeable of the craft at hand is also very important. This knowledge can be beneficial to you in many ways more than one. The first way is that it can save you time in not having to explain every little thing while doing a session or on a shoot. Having to babysit an assistant can be very time consuming and might just distract you from what it is you need to be doing. The second way in which having a knowledgable assistant can be helpful is having a mutual understanding of what it is we need to do to achieve a certain photograph or to bring our vision to reality. Having knowledge of the equipment and tools around you will help in you have less manual labor and rather just focus on pleasing the client. Knowledge is power and is proven to be useful sometimes even more than money.

I hope these short but quick tips were very helpful in you finding a photography assistant or even finding a new one. It’s always my pleasure sharing these tips and I look forward to seeing you again. Cheers!

Tips On How To Test Your Photography And Editing Skills

The ultimate way to push yourself as a photographer or even as a videographer is to consistently test your knowledge and skills without the fear of failing or looking stupid. I’m pretty sure when someone mentioned the Idea of how a camera would work, someone laughed at them too but decades later, here we are. Testing your limits as a photographer is one of the best ways to learn more about yourself as a photographer and also learn more about your craft as well.

Many of us photographer become complacent or comfortable once we’ve found that one thing we perform well at and stick to it. Some of us get stuck in our comfort zone while living in fear of trying something new or become lazy and don’t see the need to try something new overall. I can say I was once like that until I eventually got bored of the way I was creating and editing my images. I saw the need to start testing myself to see what It is in also capable of outside of being a lifestyle and portrait photographer. In this article, I will be proudly sharing with you some key tips as yo how you can test yourself and a photographer while shooting and also around your computer during post-production. I hope some of these tips inspire you to step out of your comfort zone and push yourself to be an even better photographer than you already are. Let’s begin.

1. Weekly Challenges

One of the first things I did as a photographer was starting to give myself a challenge every week to complete. If I did not complete the challenge then I would stay on it until I have successfully completed it enough to my own satisfaction. Some of these challenges were pretty easy and others were a bit complex. Nonetheless, the feeling of satisfaction once completing a challenge you thought you couldn’t have is very rewarding. For example, I once challenged myself to shoot shadows for an entire week just to see what It is I could create. To my surprise, I managed to muster up some pretty good shots even while not in my comfort zone. I have never been a fan of too many shadows in my images but said to myself there will be a day when I have no choice but to shoot with shadows in my images to please my clients.

photography skills

Challenging yourself on a weekly basis gives you something new to look forward to but also helps you to overcome your fears in photography as well. There are many challenges available online for your viewing or you can even create some challenges for yourself. I usually recommend making a list of all the things you’ve never tried while shooting or the things you’ve had a fear of doing in photography. Once you’ve made this list you can pace yourself and try each challenge until you’ve checked off all of them.

2. Explore Different Tools

Most photographers like myself usually use Photoshop or Lightroom to edit our photos on a day to day basis. We eventually start to become lazy in our editing efforts and create presets or record our editing actions so we can apply them to our images and create a faster and more efficient workflow. I cannot disagree with this type of habit as it has proven itself very useful to me in the past and I’m sure other photographers can share the same sentiment even now. However, this limits our knowledge of the software we are using and probably taking advantage of. Lightroom and Photoshop are amazing software that can easily bring your imagination to life through an image or even enhance your image beyond your imagination. With this said, explore more what the software is capable of and not limit yourself to one style of editing.

photography skills

There will be moments where your client might not like how you edited their image or feel that the way you edit is not the right match for that specific shot. In this instance, you then would need to have knowledge of other options that might work for your client but given you’ve not explored the software at your fingertips enough, you are now limited to this one style. Being creative is all about trying new things to see how they look and feel to you and the creator of them.

3. Observing Others

Every photographer is different in regards to their style of shooting or even their style of editing. A photographers work is usually signed by how they take their images for others to see. I recommend taking the time out to observe some of your favorite photographers work and test yourself to see if you can replicate or come even remotely close to a shot or edit they produced. You might not always get the same shot, depending on what exactly the shot is but you can definitely give the editing a try. I made it a habit to analyze the little details in the work of the photographer I look up to and try to mimic that to the best of my ability. What this does is give me a better sense of exactly what their style of editing and shooting is and helps to motivate me in knowing that I can also produce the same type of work or even better.

photography skills

You alone can set your limits on what it is you create or how it is you create. Testing and pushing these limits will only help to make you a better photographer and overall a better creative as you become more passionate and build a better relationship with your craft. I hope this article has inspired you to push your photography skills a little more to become a better photographer than you already are. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

How To Scout Shoot Locations At The Last Minute

Many of us can probably agree that the hardest parts of doing photography are finding your own editing style and finding locations to conduct your photography sessions. Finding the right location to match the theme or vibe of your photography session is very crucial to every photographer. Failure to successfully find the right location for your shoot may result in things such as having negative energy towards the session or having to reschedule the session overall. Both of these things can be rather inconvenient not only to the photographer but also to the client as well. Most clients don’t always have the time out of their busy schedule to have a shoot rescheduled or even you as the photographer don’t have many dates available to work with your client’s schedule. Sometimes we find ourselves in this little jam where we are forced to think on our feet and thing very quickly to make the impossible, possible. In this article today, I will be sharing with you a few ways as to how you can quickly scout a location for any shoot at the last minute. Some of these tips may seem very convenient but I urge you to not make it a habit as it might not always work out for the best but will come in handy if needed.

1. Use Social Media

We are all guilty of spending probably what is to be considered an unhealthy amount of time on our smartphones. Some of us might be doing some quick editing, responding to emails or checking the latest gossip. We sadly end up forgetting not only the power that social media has but how much it can be used as a tool in our day to day lives professionally. I have mentioned this a few times in previous articles that these platforms can be used for much more than the face value it’s being used for. A perfect example of this is the most popular app that is probably on everyone’s smartphone which is Instagram.

social media

At face value, Instagram seems like an app that is used simply to keep up to date with the lives of close friends, family, and celebrities. This is a very common mistake made even today by some of its users who are also creatives. Instagram is a great way to find out more information on a specific location based on the different post and opinions of thousands or even millions who have visited that exact location. If you make it your duty to search a specific hashtag or even a specific location, you are guaranteed to see content that will spark your interest. Upon moving to Toronto, I was not exactly sure to tell models or talents who wanted to work with me, the location I would like to shoot in. Of course, being completely new to an area, I knew so much and no more. I would put off various sessions just because I was uncertain or nervous as to the location that would work best for my theme. Eventually, I started to invest more time into using these mini search engines in apps to give myself a better idea and understanding of where it is I’m going and what to expect.

You can also try taking a look on Twitter or even Snapchat to see if there have been any recent post made about a particular location or even just in areas nearby. Social media platforms can easily be our friend as creative to help us out of a tough spot.

2. Pinterest

Using Pinterest is also very helpful in regards to quickly finding a shoot location at the last minute. It can be considered a search engine as well that once you’ve entered a few keywords, you will see images or references relating back to that keyword or words. Some of these posts will lead you to more information as well which could prove very useful depending on what it is exactly you’re looking for. All of these things can be done quickly at home or even on the go and helps to eliminate having to designate a whole day into traveling and finding a location in your local area.


These methods will also prove useful if you will be visiting somewhere completely unfamiliar to you but you would like to conduct a session there as well.

3. Use Flickr

This is a very popular platform used by photographers to share their work. Millions of photographers around the world share their images there with the location and sometimes everything else you need to know. You can easily search a location on the website or in the app on your smartphone as well to help speed up the process of you finding a convenient but useful location for your next photography session at the last minute.


It sometimes becomes so easy to forget the important things we need to do as photographers that we end up making a little mistake. I always say its best to be prepared than to be sorry but also I understand that we can sometimes be so busy that we forgot to prepare. I hope these quick and short tips will be of great help to you in a time that you may need it the most. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

Creative Ways To Use Water In Photography

Our beautiful planet is filled with so many natural resources that can be used to our disposal but also appreciated. Many of these resources are capable of playing a role in photography or even videography, to be honest. However, the natural resource that stands out the most and is available to all of us is water. Water is life and basically occupies a large percentage of the earth’s surface that is also used day today. Water doesn’t only help to bring life to us and keep us hydrated but also can bring life to our images as well if used correctly. Water can be such a patient and majestic subject in the various forms it comes in. In this article, I will be sharing with you some of the creative ways in which we can use different bodies of water around us to help make our images stand out a bit more or just speak for themselves through their beauty. Let’s begin!

1. Reflection

One of the first creative ways to use water in photography which I learned is using its reflection. Still, water can act as a perfect mirror for any subject but it is mainly used in landscape photography the most. With a reflection from the water, you can easily go for a very symmetrical composed shot or do otherwise. It works perfectly with sunset photography or even in architectural photography as well.

water reflection

Some photographers and videographers tend to hate this reflection and try to eliminate it as much as possible through using various ND filters. However, if you’re looking to create stunning shots with a body of water then this is one of the most popular and relatively easy ways.

2. Long Exposure Shots

This is another popular creative method of how you can effectively capture water in photography. I usually give this a try by a river or a waterfall but it can practically be done anywhere a body of water is and the preference is completely up to you. Long exposure shots make for great images once composed properly and done well.


The Idea behind it is to have your aperture and ISO at a reasonable value that matches your environment and slow down your shutter speed. With slow shutter speed, you will able to capture motion blur in your image that leaves for a very artistic and creative shot once done.

3. Mist & Fog

Mist and Fog have obviously been given a bad reputation in regards to driving or even in regards to photography as well. However, mist and fog can also be captured in a creative manner and not seen as an obstacle. Both these things combined can help to create a rather dreamy but rather elegant atmosphere depending on your perspective. Regardless of how unappealing the appearance of the scene might look, it is still worth capturing or giving a try.

water mist

4. Rain Photography

Try not to limit yourself to only various bodies of water but explore other options that Involve water as well. Rain photography is another great way to use water as a creative tool. In a previous article, we’ve spoken about the various tools and techniques needed to properly perform rain photography.


Rain photography itself is very fun and can yield some very rewarding results once you make your creativity or ideas to take control.

5. Water Puddles

This creative method carries us back to reflection again as rain puddles or even puddles made from snow melting can help in your creative process when composing shots. Many times I have used puddles in street photography to create a rather interesting shot or just use the wet concrete and little puddles around it to my advantage to add some character to my shot.

water puddles

This method will serve as very useful if you live in a city or can easily travel to one. Your reflection will tend to have a lot of various elements such as car lights, buildings or even people as well. These various elements will help to make your image very interesting.

6. Fast Shutter

The last method in which you can creatively use and capture water in your photography is trying using a fast shutter. Fast shutter speeds will help to produce a freeze-frame of whatever it is your capturing. For example, if you’re on a beach by some rocks and you see where the waves are crashing into these rocks then that can easily be a great shot if captured and composed correctly at a high shutter value. The high shutter value will help to capture every little detail of these waves crash into the rocks and create a very dramatic but soothing image. You can also use a high shutter speed when capturing droplets of water if you’re trying to show off or try something a little out of the box.


It doesn’t matter if you decide to capture a body of water or different forms of it, using water in your images overall can help to improve your photography and help make your images more unique. I hope this article has inspired you to give a few of these methods a try and until next time, take care.

How To Successfully Photograph A Wedding Location

When you think about it, there is a lot of planning, effort, and money that goes into successfully getting a dream wedding done. Within all this planning, everyone has there own role to complete in order to make sure everything runs smoothly. As the photographer, its easy to say you probably have the second most important job for the event, next to the wedding planner. Successfully covering a wedding can be very stressful as a photographer as there are moments you cannot replicate or do-over. In particular today, we will be talking about how you can successfully photograph a wedding location you are not completely familiar with. Many weddings these days are not always exactly local and may require you to travel to the bride or grooms expense. This can sometimes make you nervous as you are not completely sure what to expect or how the venue will work for you. Luckily the tips in this article should help you overcome this doubt or sense of nervousness and simply crush any wedding destination you are given. Let’s begin.

1. Planning

The first and most important step to successfully photographing a wedding destination is to plan. The excitement of traveling to a different country or rather just a different location can be very exciting but try to not let that distract you too much from your mission or goal.
Carefully take the time out to look over your flight or travel information and ensure that you arrive on location at least a day before the wedding.


So this simply means that if the wedding date is on a Monday, then you should at least be on location the Sunday morning. This not only gives you time to scout the location but also in the event of any delays, you were already prepared. Proper planning will help to avoid any issues in regards to the schedule of the wedding and also have the couple reassured they’re a photographer will be on time and ready.

2. Communication

I always recommend having a strong line of communication between yourself and the couple or the wedding planner. Establishing this line of communication will help to keep you up to date with any issues or changes in plans moving forward. Not only does it keep you up to date but also helps to give you a stronger sense of what is expected from you as the designated photographer. Sometimes things can fall through the cracks during a pre-consultation in person or even just over the phone.


Letting the couple or client know they have the freedom to communicate their expectations or ideas to you leading up to the date of the wedding can be very helpful. It will also come in handy with building a connection with the couple themselves to assist you in making your shots a lot more meaningful. As a photographer, it becomes easier to photograph your subject, once you know a story or meaning behind your subject or subjects.

3. Research

After carefully planning and communicating with the couple or wedding planner, it’s time to do a little more work. Researching effectively will help to give you a better understanding of the structure and layout of the location you will be covering. Thankfully, in this day and age, Google is not our only search engine to get an idea of how somewhere looks. Social media platforms such as Instagram can be a huge help as well. Try to keep an open mind and understand that there are many other individuals who’ve probably visited or even live in the area that you will be visiting very soon. Don’t limit yourself too much to regular search engines but rather explore other options that may have more recent images of the location you’re researching. Pinterest is also very helpful in regards to ideas and seeing other images posted other visitors as well.


Try not to stop your research at just looking on recent images but also dig a little deeper and see what the weather forecast should be like as well as learn a little about the locals. These things will come in handy when you least expect it.

4. Make The Most Of Every Minute Before The Wedding

This is the last but most important tip. Every second you are on location before the wedding counts and how you spend your time can be very helpful to your shots. Walk around the venue a little and observe your surroundings. Make mental note of spots you like or could use when capturing the bridal party and the groomsmen. If possible, you could also ask the wedding planner to give you a quick tour of the space or area when you arrive on location hours or a day before the wedding.


Wedding destinations can be very majestic and even help to make the wedding even more beautiful than it already is. As the storytellers for these special events, it is our duty to make sure we tell the story as beautiful as it looked in front of our camera lens.

It’s always a pleasure sharing these quick and easy tips with you in regards to how you can successfully photograph a wedding destination. I look forward to seeing you again and thank you for stopping by.

Importance Of Having A Photography Buddy

We all need a friend or some friends at some point during our life or even our career. Some friends tend to be our saving grace while others are there to always lend a helping hand or even give a few words of encouragement or advice. Today we will be discussing some of the importance of having other photographer friends like yourself and the benefits of them. It always a great feeling when you can connect and share experiences with someone in the same career field or profession as you. The conversations and ideas flow so easily and can even help to improve your skills and motivate you to do other things as well. Without spending too much time on this introduction, let’s dive in as to why it is important to have a photographer buddy or even a few.

1. Gear Sharing

One of the first important and beneficial reasons for having a photographer buddy is gear sharing. Photography is a very expensive career and most photographers like myself will sometime find that they can’t afford a particular piece of equipment or it’s not available to them as they would like. Another photographer might just have this same piece of equipment you need and is willing to share it for the benefit of your craft. I have found myself in many jams where I need a specific lens or some lighting and having the freedom to call upon one of my photographer friends to give me a helping hand has helped me so much on past projects.


Not only can they help you with their gear but you can also lend a helping hand to them as well and see what projects they have coming up. It all about forming or developing a mutually beneficial friendship that will serve well each of you.

2. Having Company

By nature, I am a true introvert and sometimes find that I enjoy working alone for an extended period of time. This is not completely healthy as it is always good to take a break and socialize or hang out with a friend overall. Having a photography buddy will serve as a good company while working on a project or even just doing post-production editing. Engaging in meaningful conversation or activities while you work can help to add some fun to your daily task and not have them dull or lonely.

business partner

3. Different Perspective

Everyone sees things differently and have different opinions about certain topics or things. Some of these opinions or views can serve as very useful to your craft as it opens up your eyes to a whole new way of think or viewing something in particular. The way two or more people can think completely different about one topic will always amaze me in ways that I have used to my advantage. Photographers with a different style of shooting will always have something to add to your work which might just enhance it or make it that much better.

4. Networking

As I’ve mentioned in many previous articles, networking is the key to building your brand as a photographer. Other photographers can easily help you network yourself into knowing the right people or getting involved with the right brands to boost your brand as well. What might be your strength might be other photographers weakness and that’s where you come in handy. Your photographer buddy has the potential to recommend you to a client who needs your style of photography which will further earn you a new client and also increase your network.


Likewise, you should do the same for your photographer friends as well and help them meet and network with possible new clients. For example, I have never really been the absolute best at wedding photography but I do know someone who is that could capture some amazing shots at a wedding. Instead of me taking the client and by chance not giving them the quality shots they deserve, I would rather pass it on to my friend. The world works in very mysterious ways and what you do for others, they just might do for you.

5. Learning Opportunity

Nobody actually knows everything. In a growing industry like photography or even videography, there is always something new to learn. With that said, there is always the opportunity to learn some new things from your photographer friends as well. As much as I give tips and tricks to beginners and other professional photographers, there are often things I learn from them as well. Never think you’re so smart that you don’t need someone else to teach you something. The world of photography is always evolving as you should too as well. Keep your mind and ear open and to what others like yourself have to say.

I hope these points about the importance of having a photographer buddy has helped you to find yours and connect or bond more with them. It’s always a pleasure sharing and I look forward to doing it again, thank you.

Recommended Equipment For Succeeding in Night Photography

Night photography has always been a fascinating genre for me. It always so amazing how everything tends to change just a little bit when the sun goes down and the street lights or neon lights come on. Night photography in its own respects is almost like a whole new world. Having moved to the city of Toronto, I’ve gradually grown to appreciate and practice it a bit more over the past few months. Having practicing it here and there has motivated me to share with you some tip I recommend in terms of gear for night photography. Some of this gear most your probably already have so these tips won’t be too long or hard to understand.

1. Camera

The first thing to have in your bag when going out for night photography is obviously your camera. Not having this would defeat the purpose of going out overall. However, I’m not talking about the camera itself but rather the capabilities of the camera you’re thinking about packing. Upgrading your camera these days can really be a hassle and not mention expensive but there are some key things to take into consideration before diving into night photography. One of these key things to consider is your camera’s maximum ISO value. You will be outside working in low light conditions which mean you will have to bump up your ISO a bit to capture great texture and details in your shot.

night photography

The problem with this is that if you are using an entry-level or rather an amateur camera then you will run into issues. Most entry-level cameras tend to introduce noise to your image once you’ve set it to ISO 800 or a little beyond that. This will result in a lot of noise in your image that can indeed be fixed in post-production but you don’t want to give yourself the extra work. Check the capabilities of your camera first before heading out, to make sure you will be getting the best quality image in low light as possible.

2. Tripod

This second piece of equipment that is crucial to night photography as well as your trusty tripod. You may find yourself shooting at a relatively low shutter speed which will introduce the possibility of motion blur or camera shake. Some of us are not blessed with steady hands so this will eventually be a problem. Your tripod will help you to achieve much sharper shots and reduce the chance of getting any motion blur at all.

night photography

3. Lens

Choosing or packing the right lens or lenses is also very important while packing your camera itself. Packing the right lens can often be subjective to what it is you’re looking to capture. However, I generally recommend picking a wide angle lens with an aperture large enough to help let in more light when shooting. My go-to lens when doing this kind of photography is usually my 24-70mm f/2.8. This lens offers me a wide enough angle with the freedom to zoom in and out if I want while still having a great maximum aperture of f/2.8 which is all you really need.

night photography

4. Remote Shutter

This piece of equipment could be considered optional depending on your method when doing night photography. Most if not all DSLR or mirrorless cameras are equipt with a timer for your shutter. This comes in handy in situations where you want to capture a family photo while still being in the photo yourself as the photographer or if you’re trying to reduce as much camera shake as possible in addition to what your tripod is already doing. However, you also have the option of using a shutter remote which basically gives you the same freedom as a timer would but it could be considered a more convenient alternative to the timer on your camera. When working in situations where your shutter will be open for less than 30 seconds then there is practically no need to have a remote shutter but if you plan on going beyond that then it might be a good choice for you.

Remote shutters these days are not as expensive as they sound. If you don’t already have one then they’re pretty easy to find on Amazon or at your nearest camera store. I can also assure you that purchasing one of these bad boys won’t put too much of a dent in your pocket.

5. Filter

Feel free to pack a Natural Light Filter as well because they do come in handy. The natural light filter helps a lot in cases where there is a lot of light pollution. It helps to give you a relatively crisp contrasty image while reducing some of the light pollutions in your photo as well.

night photography

As always, its a pleasure sharing these simple pointers with you and I do look forward to seeing you again, take care!

Useful Tips On How To Master Your Lenses

Investing in your equipment and your craft is always the first important step to becoming a good photographer. However, mastering those tools or equipment is another important step to becoming a great photographer. As professional photographers, we tend to accumulate a series of tools over the years. Some of these tools we hardly use and others, we’ve actually never used at all but we have them sitting somewhere. Today we will be talking about your lens collection. More specifically, we will be diving into how you can master each and every one of your lenses in your collection and a few reasons why it’s important to as well. Being a master of your tools will only help you to become a master of your craft and take another step to be a master in something else as well so let’s begin.

1. Dedicate Time

The first step in mastering each lens in your collection is to dedicate time to that lens. By this, I mean you should shoot exclusively for a whole month or 2 weeks with that lens alone. This will force you of your comfort zone and encourage you to test new boundaries with your lens itself. As photographers, we are often very easily spoilt with all the options and equipment we have to our disposal.


We become so used to a spoilt by these things that we forget how to compromise and create good images without them. This is not to say those extra tools are not important but they don’t encourage you to explore other options. Once you’ve decided to dedicate a certain amount of time to use one lens for a certain period then you will see what it is you and your lens are capable of. Sometimes it’s when we have next to nothing that we realize what we really can do. Becoming a master at anything will take some time, so make sure you’re very patient with yourself.

2. Shoot Different Subjects

Once you’ve chosen your lens for the month or whatever duration you agreed to then you can explore your subject choices. We will often find yourself linking your equipment or lenses rather to different subjects or genres of photography. While this is a fair assumption or habit to develop, it is also bad as well. Many of your lenses are capable of doing things outside of the imaginary box we put it in. For example, your 50mm f/1.8 lens is capable of shooting other things outside of portraits, regardless of it being referred to as a portrait lens. We set these imaginary boundaries for yourself and our gear without even sometimes noticing it. To break out of this habit, we have to find or encourage diversity in our lenses and try to capture different subjects in different situations. Some of you may wonder why is this so important but I assure you, you will later appreciate it once you’ve given it a try.

3. Test Your Composition Limits

As some of you may already know, composition plays a key role in the success or failure of a shot or shots. A lot of things are taken into consideration when talking about composition but finding out its limits is a whole new ball game. Testing the limits of things such as this and pushing them to their extreme is when you gain a better understanding of what you’re truly capable of as a creative. To test the limits in composition on any lens is to do the complete opposite of what that lens is actually intended for.


To give an example, let’s say for instance your lens of choice for the month is a 24mm f/2.8. This lens is usually intended for wide-angle landscape shots. However, what do you think you could accomplish if you try shooting with it in a portrait style and getting super close to your subjects rather than taking steps back. This will not only push your lens to its limits in composition but also push you to yours and encourage you to think outside the box of what’s possible and just go for it. Pushing limits or extremes are all apart of becoming a master of anything. I always tell myself that if it was easy then maybe everyone would be doing it as well.

4. Test Your Apertures

Last but not least, when it comes to mastering lenses you need to know it inside and out. Make habit of trying your lens at different aperture values and observe how it performs. When testing how your lens performs at different aperture values, you will find yourself looking out for a few things. The two most important things to observe are its technical performance and aesthetic quality. There is currently no lens that performs the same throughout all aperture values so running this test will help you know the result or have an idea of what the result will be at a certain aperture on that specific lens.


Mastering your tools will always help you to become a better photographer than you already are. I hope this article has inspired you to challenge yourself and try something new this month. It’s always a pleasure and until next time, take care.

Why Every Photographer Should Have A 24-70mm Lens

Remember as a kid, you would always have your favorite toy that you held close and would really want to share but never had a problem showing it off to others. As we grew older, we slowly but surely kept this kind of mentality as adults by holding on to some of our favorite things. As a photographer, one of my favorite toys in my camera bag was my 50mm f/1.4 lens. No matter where I’m going or where I’m going to be, I made sure to have that lens either mounted on to my camera or at least in my backpack close by. However, as time progressed and find interest in other toys, you start to appreciate them as well. This toy for me was the 24-70mm f/2.8 II USM standard zoom lens. It was a very expensive toy but I can honestly say that it was worth every dollar spent. As I spent more time with this lens in the field, I started to see and understand why It was so popular with professional photographers like myself. In this article, I will be pointing out each point as to why every photographer should own or at least attempt to own this lens.

1. Range Versatility

One of the first benefits I noticed with this lens is the versatility you get in range with different focal lengths. After getting used to working with prime lenses so long, It was kind of weird to have a zoom lens mounted to my camera with a relatively low aperture. The range in this lens offers some limitless possibilities in the field and will instantly blow you away.


We’ve always spoken about variation in shots taken, which this lens also helps to encourage. You can easily go from capturing a frame at a wide-angle to getting up close and personal with your subject without having to pull for your 50mm or 85mm lens. Not to get mistaken, I still love the 50mm f/1.4, but when it comes to convenience and quickly changing your focal lengths then there is no comparison. That lapse in time that is sometimes used up reaching into your camera bag, taking off a lens to mount another with better focal length can often result in missing crucial or important shots. This lens will eliminate that issue totally and you can practically shoot with it for the whole day depending on your preference.

2. No Learning Curve

This lens comes with no learning curve and pretty great for any beginner in photography. The range in focal length of this lens is actually inspired a lot by the human eye and as a result, it’s not too hard for anyone to adjust to. This lens will help you to appreciate and learn a little bit more about composition and some of the importance of capturing wide-angle shots as well as portrait style or close up shots.


The common focal length for portrait or close up shots is usually 50mm which this lens goes 20mm beyond that so you can appreciate getting even close to your subject without moving. The 24-70mm lens is a great stepping stone for beginners to learn the importance of variety in shots as well as appreciate them.

3. Durability

Different companies tend to make each of their lenses with a different type of material that can sometimes be a little too cheap or weak for the use the consumer has for it. This is not the case when regarding the Canon 24-70mm f/2.8. It has been commonly described or referred to in the photography world as the “walk-around” lens and our friends at Canon made sure it was built durable enough to handle a daily commute.


Having used this lens in some very unfriendly environments, I can say it is built to last and withstand anything you throw at it. Well, unless it’s a rock for whatever reason. It has been equipt with weather protection and a rather sturdy but comfortable body to hold when out shooting. Considering its size, which is relatively average, the 24-70mm is a lens that is built to last you as long as you need it to, once cared for properly.

4. Size

After speaking about durability and built, it would be wrong to not talk a bit about the size. The size of this lens relatively average compared to another zoom lens. Of course, it is not smaller than my 50mm nor does it even remotely weight the same. However, I will say this lens is not the heaviest nor is it the largest lens on the market so don’t be so quick to judge. Based on my experience, It is pretty easy to pack into your camera bag and carry around or even mount to your camera without adding too much unnecessary weight. The capabilities of this lens will eventually outweigh it’s physical burdens if you do find any.

Adjusting to a new toy can often have you nervous but eventually will start to get used to it in due time. I hope this article has inspired you to go out and get yourself for yourself so that you too can enjoy the benefits of having this lens. Until next time, take care.

What To Pack For International Trips In Travel Photography

Traveling is probably one of my favorite things to do as a photographer, especially when traveling internationally. The world is such a big place with so much to see and learn about a different culture and different people. We have the advantage to document these experiences through our images, in an effort to share our adventure with others or maybe even brag a little bit. Packing your camera bag for an international trip can be a bit of a headache sometimes because you don’t want to forget anything you might need. It won’t be as simple as a road trip where you can probably turn around and go back home but rather you’re stuck with what you have. In this article, we will be talking a little bit about that in regards to what you should pack in your camera bag as a photographer traveling internationally and looking to document the journey.

1. Camera Bag

The first step to ensuring you’re prepared for an international trip is to make sure you have the right camera bag for the trip or a good camera bag overall. There are a few things to look out for when choosing a camera bag for traveling internationally. One of those key things is accessibility and durability. The last thing you want while traveling internationally is to have a bag that is not easily accessible when on the move. This can be very frustrating and cause hindrance during your transit or while shooting. The next key thing is durability. Nobody want’s to be in a country they are not totally familiar with and have their camera bag fail them in the field with all their equipment in it. This is probably one of my biggest fears as a traveling photographer, so I ensure my bag is ready to endure whatever environments I’m about to be subjected to.


There are other things to consider when picking out your camera bag as well such as the number of compartments and your comfort. Compartments mean a lot when it comes to a good camera bag because you will always need a place to store away something, no matter how small or big it is. Compartments will help to properly organize and protect your gear while traveling in the event that you need to find anything, you know exactly where it is. Also, your comfort is very important as well. One of the cons to traveling as a photographer is that sometime you walk around with so much equipment just to be sure you have everything you need that you end up walking with a huge bulk on your back. If you do indeed need all that equipment, then you should at least try to carry it all around comfortably. Many camera bags come with technology that helps to equally distribute weight on your shoulders and back to avoid any strain or pain. It makes walking around with a whole studio on your back that much easier, regardless of how heavy it is.

2. Hard Case

Protecting your memory cards is very important as they can get damaged very easily. As a result of that, I encourage you to carry all your memory cards in what is called a hard case. This will help to protect them while in transit or on the move. Anything can happen and sometimes we can see where things can get loose and move all over your bag.


3. Cleaning Kit

We can’t predict the future but we can prepare for it as much as possible so that we don’t suffer the consequences. Packing your cleaning kit when traveling internationally is very important for many reasons. One of those reasons is being prepared for the worst in terms of the environment or atmosphere you might find yourself in. You can never be too sure what somewhere else has in store for you and your camera so make sure you’re prepped and ready.


4. External Hard Drive

If you don’t already have one, then I do recommend looking to getting one before you go on or plan a trip. External hard drives are very important as a photographer, especially one who is traveling. You can never be too sure how many shots you’re going to take on a trip as a million things might catch your eye.


Not having or picking your external hard drive will limit you as to what you can capture if all your other memory cards are full. With your hard drive, you will have the freedom to dump your images daily onto it and have a piece of mind that you have all your shots already secured and backed up.

5. A Travel Tripod

Last but not least, look into getting a travel-friendly tripod. These can really come in handy when on the move and are very cost-effective along with not adding too much weight to your already heavy camera bag.


Traveling the world is filled with so anticipation and curiosity. I hope this article has helped you get prepared for your next international trip. I look forward to sharing more tips with you again very soon.

Useful Tips On How To Clean Your Tripod

In many previous articles, we’ve mentioned and spoken so much about the importance of tripods and how they play an important role in our day to day photography or our career overall as photographers. Tripods, in my opinion, are of those tools that always come in hand when you need to make your work even better but does not get much recognition or appreciation as it deserves. Some of us photographers, which I am guilty as well, tend to throw our tripods around and treat them like they are less than what they actually are which is our saving grace. In this article, I will be giving some tips on how we can treat our tripods a little better and give them a clean that will make them sparkle as if they were brand new. Some of these tips may be subjective to the size or material your tripod is made out of but some of the principles are pretty much the same so let’s begin.

What Do You Need?

To properly clean your tripod you will need a few things that can possibly be found around your house if you’re lucky. Some of the things you will need are:

– Microfiber Cloth or Cotton Cloth
– An Old Toothbrush
– Soapy Water
– Some Tools To Disassemble The Tripod
– A small bowl
– Canned or Pressurized Air
– Grease

Once you’ve properly looked around your house and find these tools then you’re pretty much ready to go and start the process of taking care of your tripod and giving it a well deserved clean.

Step 1: Disassemble The Legs

After you’ve got all your trusty tools together and cleared a space as a work station then it’s time to start. The first towards cleaning your tripod is to first disassemble the legs of the tripod. Some if not most tripods come equipt with the tools made to disassemble it but if you’re not certain then take a quick a look in your owner manual to make sure you’re doing the right thing. If you got your tripod second hand and not completely brand new which was what happened in my case then you can type in the name or model of the tripod and find details or an online manual. Remember, the internet is your friend. Anything you’re not completely sure about, don’t be afraid to take a moment to do your research before moving forward.

Step 2: Take Legs Apart

This second step is pretty easy as most tripods use the method to pull the legs apart. This method is to simply twist the lowest part or sections of the leg as if you’re trying to extend it and keep twisting until it eventually comes off. Once you’ve successfully done that, then you should be able to slide the leg out of the tube it was. While doing this be very careful not to make plastic parts fall out of place as they are usually crucial to the functionality of the tripod itself.

If your tripod consists of a series of screws or nuts to do a complete removal of the legs then you should carefully remove those as well and put them into the small bowl we mentioned earlier. Once you’ve successfully removed the legs from your tripod then its time to start a bit of the cleaning process.


You want to start by grabbing your canned or pressurized air and using it to blow off any dust or dust particles that may be in the grooves or threads of the legs parts. You then take your old toothbrush and dip it into your soapy water and then proceed to brush the areas that are evidently dirty or better yet, brush everywhere regardless. Just to make sure we don’t miss any spots that we will end up regretting. Once you’ve successfully brushed these areas until you’re satisfied and they seem clean enough, then you can use your cotton or microfiber cloth to dry off the areas.

Step 3: Tripod Feet

The feet of your tripod is probably the most used and abused part as it often placed in many undesirable places such as mud, dirty water or even snow in my case. It is important to clean and maintain the feet of your tripod as often as possible because that’s the part you rely on when using your tripod.


The possibility that you will get the feet dirty again tomorrow is probably high but it’s important to clean them regardless. Give the feet a proper brush with your soapy water and make sure to get into every little space there is because of it very possible to have a build-up of dirt in these areas. Once you’ve cleaned it properly then you can get your cotton or microfiber cloth again and dry the area.

Step 4: Tripod Head

This is another heavily used area of your tripod that will require some attention as well. This is the area where your camera sits when the tripod is in use. Cleaning your tripod head might be a bit tricky as most tripod heads are not designed or meant to be disassembled by their users. Some tripod heads are actually sealed from the factory and any attempt to remove this seal may result in your tripod becoming useless to you. To be safe, only remove the part seem easily accessible or like they are capable of being removed. Once you’ve accessed the head of your tripod and carefully removed the parts that are able to be removed then you grab your old toothbrush again. Repeat the same thing you did with the tripod feet and brush everywhere until satisfied and then dry off with your cotton or microfiber cloth.

Step 5: Other Parts

Some tripods may have a few extra bells and whistles for your benefit so don’t be afraid to detach those as well and give them a quick clean. It’s important you get as much clean as possible to ensure you get the best use out of your tripod.


Step 6: Reassemble

Once you’ve completed all those steps, then its time to put everything back together again like a puzzle. However before you do that, remember to add some waterproof grease on threads that are meant to tighten or loosen any parts on your tripod. After you’ve done this then you can gradually put all the screws and bolts back in their place.

I hope this article was a great help in making your tripod look and feel brand new. It’s always a pleasure helping out you guys and I look forward to doing it again. Thank you!

Composition Mistakes Made By Beginners

There are many elements that usually help to separate a good photographer from a great photographer. One of these elements that are often discussed and talk about is the element of the composition. The composition of a photographer’s work is something that can be used to make or break the overall image itself. I have seen many images fail or lose their lust just based on the angle the photographer shot from or how they composed the shot. In this article, I will be sharing with you some of the mistakes you don’t want to make as a beginner when composing your shots. Some of these mistakes I have personally made myself when I was a beginner and others were noticed based on the observation and study of work done by other photographers like myself. So without dragging this introduction out any longer, let’s begin.

1. Subject In The Middle Of The Frame

The idea of having your subject in the dead center or middle of the frame might sound appealing and correct but in reality, this is not the most convenient or best way to capture your subject. Most if not all DSLR or even mirrorless camera’s offers a grid so we can properly compose our shots. This grid has lines that run both horizontally and vertically intentionally or our use. Based on the rule of thirds, the main subject in your frame should actually be placed where these lines cross each other into a full third.

composition mistakes

The other elements in your shot should also line up with the grid as well for a perfectly composed shot. I know sometimes this method is not the most ideal in some cases but for the most part, putting this into practice will help to improve your composition and have a basic understanding of how your shots should actually be composed. I have seen some photographers achieve this naturally while others like myself had to gradually learn until it became as normal as breathing so don’t be ashamed.

2. Small Subject In A Large Frame

Another common mistake I have made myself as well as others are not taking into consideration the size of my subject within the frame. Sometimes we end up taking pictures with a relatively small subject in the frame that we were focused on but when you take a look on your image from a viewers perspective, you tend to not see the point. Don’t get me wrong, there are often times where this method of having a small subject is used very creatively. However, in the basics of composition, it’s best to get your subject to a relatively good size so your viewer can understand what exactly it is you are trying to convey through your image.

3. Busy Backgrounds

Frames that have too much happened behind your subject can sometimes be very annoying or even distracting to a viewer. It can easily take their attention from the importance of the subject itself and then begin trying to figure out what exactly was happening behind the subject when the image was taken.

composition mitakes

I recommend keeping your backgrounds as simple as possible or not too busy to the point it takes away from the importance of your subject. Regardless of how your background might be depending on the lens, focal length or aperture you are shooting at, it is still important to take into consideration the scene behind your subject.

4. Incorrect Use Of Depth Of Field

Depth of field is our friend in many ways more than on if used correctly or used at the right time. The depth of field in our image can be determined by two main things. The first main thing is the distance we are from our subject and the second thing is how wide our aperture is. Sadly we sometimes do not use this to our advantage when composing our shots when it could be of great help. Using depth of field correctly will increase the emphasis placed on your subject within your frame and also help your subject stand out more than it’s background regardless of what is in it. This has helped tremendously with portraits and some areas of street or urban photography as well.

composition mistakes

5. Sloppy Lines

This is the last but not remotely the least mistake made in basic composition for beginners. Having sloppy line work in your image can easily throw off the whole balance of the shot itself. This can apply to each genre of photography from landscape to even portrait photography as well. As I mentioned earlier, most if not all cameras offer a grid that can be used to guide you in balancing and composing your shots very well. Use this grid and make sure the lines in your frame match up evenly with the lines in your grid before you close that shutter. If it’s a little of then there is no need to worry as some shots can be corrected in Lightroom or Photoshop. However, don’t make that an excuse to make the same mistake twice.

I hope pointing out some of these mistakes will help you not to make the same mistakes yourself. Until next time, I look forward to seeing you again.

How Improving Yourself Can Help To Improve Your Photography

It is sometimes so easy as creatives to be caught up in our craft and forget some of the most important things that make a good photographer or a good creative. Before some of us established our passion for photography, we were just normal people going about our daily lives and then we found something that made each day worth it. We all eventually picked up a camera and started to see the world differently and capture it in the way we see it as different individuals. Sometimes it’s so easy to get lost or caught up into this cycle of creating especially once you’ve developed an established business that you can begin to lose a sense of who you truly are and pretty much turn into a machine. I have suffered through this and would like to share some very useful tips that will come in handy for improving yourself to, later on, improve your photography as well. A photographers work is pretty much a part of them in many ways more than one. Some of us could even say that a photographer is pretty much one with his work so his or her work is a reflecting of him or herself. Once this is taken into consideration then we can start to see the importance of improving yourself as a person to also improve yourself as a photographer. Let’s begin.

1. Don’t Be Lazy

The first step to improving yourself as a person and as a photographer is to stop being lazy and go for the little things you want. Sometimes we can get so complacent or comfortable when we’ve gotten to a certain point in our life or career that we forget to push harder or try to accomplish more. If you’ve been having a nagging Idea in your mind to try out then you should go out and do it.

improve yourself

What I always tell myself is that if it was easy then everyone would be doing it but the things that really matter are never truly easy. The time we sometimes spend scrolling through our social media looking at the work of other photographers, mildly lusting at how amazing their shots are, you can create some of those same shots or even better yourself. Invest time into accomplishing something you’ve wanted to do at least every two weeks or every month depending on what this thing is and that will motivate you to pump the same energy into your photography.

2. Take A Break Sometimes

It’s always healthy to take a step away from everything for a little bit and make some time to relax or do something you genuinely enjoy. We eventually get caught up into a cycle that we turn a blind eye to the things we used to enjoy and appreciate but now we are robots. This can sometimes make us very antisocial as well which is unhealthy. Pay attention to other things important in your life such as friends and family who will value your time and company. It’s too easy that we forget about the ones around us that have always been there before we even knew what a shutter was. Explore and cherish these relationships to the point they will spill over into your work and help to give each image you take a deeper meaning.

improve yourself

Cut back on your daily task at hand that is not essential or important to your business, craft or work. Invest your time wisely into the things you cherish and not waste it on the thing you don’t. Time holds much value and once it is wasted, it is not easily regained.

3. Get Yourself Organized

Being organized as a person can be very beneficial to your craft as well. Taking a few hours out of your busy schedule to declutter and reorganized can play a huge roll in being organized in your photography. I often find that when I clean my room or my office it helps to not only get me mentally focused but put me in a state of mind to be organized in whatever I am doing. For example, being organized in your personal life will encourage you to take a look through all those old pictures you have stored in the cloud or on your external hard drive and organize them a bit more. If you’re the type of photographer to just dump your photos onto your hard drive then you should really take the time to get some organizing done before its too late.

4. Socialize

This pretty much adds to my second point with taking a break. Apart from family and friends, you should also feel free to go and socialize and try to meet some new people as well. There might just be other photographers or creatives like yourself who are looking to take a break and just meet some new people. Sometimes meeting new people can give us a sense of refreshment in our lives or even a new perspective on many things.

improve yourself

I hope this article has helped to improve yourself as an individual and even more as a professional photographer as well. It’s always a pleasure to help and give some useful tips to my fellow creatives. Until next time, take care

Benefits Of Carrying Less Gear As A Photographer

There is often a common misunderstanding about the appearance of photographers to other individuals that have become very popular and is sometimes used to determine if a photographer is a professional or not. This common misunderstanding is that a photographer should have a big backpack on their back along with two cameras strapped to their side and pretty much look like they’re about to go on a hike. People usually think that the more equipment you have is the more professional you are and not acknowledge the fact that it’s not the equipment that makes the photographer. For example, you can have two separate photographers with the same equipment or with one having less than the other and get two separate results as they both use the equipment they have very different. In this article, I will be sharing some of the simple benefits of traveling with less gear as a photographer. In many previous articles, I have stated that less can always be more depending on the type of photographer or creative you are and here are some useful reasons why.

Reason #1: Weight Restrictions

One of the most important benefits of limiting the amount of gear you carry around as a photographer is a fact that you lessen the weight on your back. Traveling around with a lot of gear can be very stressful not only on your back but on your shoulder as well. Constantly carrying around these heavy loads can sometimes have long term effect as well on your physical health and in some cases will require the help of pain medication or even resorting to getting massages on a periodical basis.

camera bag

In this day and age, there are some bags that are engineered for the photographer who likes to travel heavy or need to travel with a lot of equipment. These bags work to evenly distribute weight on each should and your back while providing comfort on the move. However, this comfort will only last for so long and at some point, you will become tired or exhausted. Packing light or carrying less gear will not only help lessen the strain on your back and shoulders but also increase your mobility and extend your range of travel if walking.

Reason #2: No Bulk

In addition, to have less weight on your back, there is also the benefit of having less of bulk as well. Obviously traveling with a lot of gear in your bag means that your bag will consist of a lot of things that vary inside and weight. Unless organized properly, all of these things can gradually form a bulk which can be annoying in the field and when traveling. I don’t know about you but when I want to find something, I like to find it quickly and not have to skim through a series of 50 different things to find what I want. Carrying less gear will eliminate this problem and give you access to the things you need very quickly and easily.

camera bag

In addition to having a bulk within the camera bag, there is also the issue of the bag itself being a bulk on your back as well cause hindrance to certain positions when shooting. For example, there will be moments where you have to fit in very questionable or tight spaces just to get your shot or shots and having this bulk on your back can be a problem. This bulk can not only be a problem for you but also others around you as well. Having been a victim of this, you are sometimes not even aware of the effects your camera bag is having on others as it may bounce them or even be a nuisance. Less gear will eliminate the issues of having a bulk on your back and by extension help others as well.

Reason #3: Changes In Composition

One of the creative benefits of packing less gear is that it has the potential to force you out of your comfort zone and encourages you to try new things that you probably wouldn’t have considered before. Not having some of the gear to make your life easier is sometimes very good. As photographers, we can tend to get a bit too complacent or dependent on some of our equipment. Even though they do serve their purpose, you actually sometimes don’t even need them. One of the things I’ve learned through leaving some of my gear at home, namely a few of my lenses is how to compose and recompose my shots effectively.


There are many times I got used to having my 50mm or my 85mm on me that I was so caught up into capturing subjects very up close and personal until I intentionally didn’t pack those lenses and traveled with just my 24mm f/2.8. I would be lying if I said it wasn’t a challenge to capture nothing but wide angle shots when I was so used to my other lenses but nonetheless it taught me a valuable lesson. I eventually learned that sometimes the bigger picture matters and sometimes if you’re too close to your subject you can sometimes forget to appreciate what’s behind or around it as well.

I hope this article has inspired you to take a look in your camera bag and take out a few things just to see how much these benefits can help. It’s always a pleasure sharing these simple but useful tips with you and I look forward to seeing you again.

The Art Of Subject Isolation In Photography: Beginners

As photographers, we tend to develop our own craftsmanship behind our images the more experienced we get or the more we practice. This craftsmanship is what helps us to develop and acknowledge our different styles in how we shoot as well the different styles in how we edit. I have never been one to believe that any two photographers are the same, however, they might be similar. Nonetheless, there is a common interest that all if not most photographers share. This common interest is the appreciation and love we have for subject isolation in our images. Having great subject isolation in your shots not only helps to enhance the look of the shot overall but it also adds extra sense creativity to the shot as well. In this article, I will be sharing a few simple but useful tips and tricks as to how you can achieve great subject isolation in photography as a beginner. These tips are pretty simple and short, which will have you doing great subject isolation in no time so let’s begin.

Tip #1: Lighting

Something that is often overlooked when it comes to isolating your subject by most photographers is taking into account the lighting you’re working with. Having a dark background with adequate light on your subject can help to make for dramatic isolation of your subject itself. With the right settings, you can help to make your subject pop more while making the background extremely dark or in some cases, having it black. This method is particularly great for portraits in street photography.

subject isolation

Try to keep an eye out for these ideal lighting situations such as large areas with a shade that is not affected by light directly. This technique has been helping when shooting urban portraits with an aim to captivate my viewers. The key to getting method correctly is finding the right balance between the light and shade in your frame. If you’re shooting in complete auto which I hope you’re not then your camera will try to analyze the light in the whole frame and work to compensate for the darks in your background. Make sure your camera is on manual and play around with your settings a bit so you get the right amount of exposure to see your subject properly while at the same time keeping your dark areas in the background.

Tip #2: Depth Of Field

This is one of the most popular and easy methods when it comes to subject isolation. With a very careful and control focus and a shallow depth of field, it is very easy to Isolate your subject. However, this method is effectively achieved with low aperture lenses such as a 50mm f/1.4. This lens should every photographer’s first purchase when upgrading their gear from just a regular kits lens. The 50mm eventually teaches you how to appreciate a prime lens as well as give you a basic understanding of how aperture works. In addition to gaining a basic knowledge of how the aperture in lens works, you learn how to use it to your advantage as well.

subject isolation

Using a very wide aperture is one of the key ingredients to this method but don’t make the mistake thinking that it’s all about your f-stop value and that’s it.

The next thing to take into consideration is your distance from the subject you are capturing as it also plays a roll in achieving a very smooth, yet effective background blur which helps to make your subject stand out more. This method is not limited to only the 50mm but can also be achieved on an 85mm as well. Truth be told, the isolation that is achieved on an 85mm is a little better than that of the 50mm but nonetheless, you can test them out yourself and see which one you like the most.

Tip #3: Set Your Focal Points

Another thing that I found helped was actively setting my autofocus point to the center. I began to make it habit in an effort to enhance my subject Isolation a bit more while also getting my subject super sharp as well. This method has proven very helpful and I do recommend that you give it a try as a beginner or even if you’re a professional and have not yet tried.

subject isolation

Tip #4: Composition

My final tip would be to carefully compose your shots when trying to isolate or place emphasis on your subject. Choosing carefully what you include or exclude from your frame can either help to place emphasis on your subject or distract the viewer from what they should be focusing on in the first place. Try moving your subject around a little here and there and carefully look at what’s going on in your background. I usually try to keep my backgrounds very simple and not too busy so there is nothing too distracting from the main subject. This might be a bit tricky especially in busy environments such as a market or even in a busy city but if you look hard enough and carefully compose the shot as you are supposed to then you are guaranteed to appreciate the results. I always like to think like a true minimalist in these cases and preach that less is always more.

subject isolation

I hope these simple tips and tricks have been helpful in learning the craft of isolating your subjects in photography and by extension improving your images as well. It’s always a pleasure and until next time, take care.

How To Avoid Meltdowns When Photographing Children Under 5

Photographing children can be one of the most adorable and precious sessions you do as a photographer but It can also be very challenging and scary at times. Capturing images of children under a certain age can often be a very challenging process depending on the child themselves and the steps you make towards making the child feel better in front of the camera. In this article, I’m going to be talking about just a few tips and trick that I’ve found to come in handy to avoid meltdowns when photographing kids under the age of 5.

With kids under this age, it’s usually a demanding process to not only get their attention but keep it long enough to get a proper shot before having them get frustrated or start to shut down. You will sometime find that kids will get annoyed and decided that they no longer want to participate in what’s going on but rather go back to their parent or parents. However, there is a trick or secret to everything which I will be listing as long as you promise to not tell anyone else.

1. Right Timing

One of the first tricks I learned with avoiding meltdowns with kids is choosing the most appropriate time to shoot. We tend to be accustomed to book sessions according to our agenda; for sessions where the subject are children under 5, their agenda should be your priority. You will now be working with whatever time is best for the child and yourself as well as the parents.


Most children at the age are usually energetic. A good strategy to implement could be to ensure they have lunch and a well-deserved nap prior to the photo session. This depends entirely on the child’s own personality, so it’s up to the parents to decide which time would be best for scheduling a session.

2. Snacks And Toys

The quickest way to any kids heart is to have a snack they love or a toy they enjoy playing with. This will grab their attention within minutes but I can assure you it won’t be for too long. Not only is it the quickest way to grab their attention but it is the easiest remedy for a cranky or grumpy child. Kids usually enjoy snacking throughout the day even if its to just have some juice and cracker, they’re guaranteed to enjoy it especially if its a favorite of theirs. Depending on how long the session may last you should inform the parent or parents to carry along some of their favorite snacks or toys with them and in the event the parents forget for whatever reason, you have some snacks of your own that might just do the trick.


You can also use these moments while they’re snacking to capture some extra candids for the parents as well. The snacks will help to get them re-energized and ready for a few more shots heading towards the end of the session. The toys can also be used as rewards for good behavior or following your instructions. Kids often love to feel as if they did something significantly good and rewarded for it which will also help in your favor.

3. Avoid The “N” Word

This might raise some eyebrows but this is very important when wanting to avoid a meltdown from happening. Kids enjoy the freedom of doing exactly whatever they want when they want to do it. Hearing the word “No” too much from their parent or parents can often bring about frustration and worst case some defiant behavior just to rebel against what their parents said. Not uttering “No” too much will help to prevent a tension-filled atmosphere mixed with attitude but rather encourage a relaxed one.


Children under 5 are usually filled with so much energy and there are many ways that they like to burn through that energy. Eventually what goes up must eventually come down and at some point all that energy is going to be finished and by the end of the session they will be sleepy and ready to get home to get in bed.

Instead of using the word “No” encourage the parents to use other phrases that are still telling the child not to do something but in a more distracting or subtle manner.

4. Reschedule If Necessary

Some children won’t always be in the mood to take pictures or even do anything else than playing with their toys or probably be at home watching their favorite kiddies show. If the child is showing no sign of improvement as it regards to behavior or attitude then you should not be afraid to reschedule the shoot to another day. Just like us adults, some kids will have their good and their bad days but it’s up to the parents to determine what might be a better day to get some images. Reschedule if necessary because there is always a chance you will get some better shots on the next day so don’t be scared to do what’s needed.


It’s always a pleasure sharing these simple but useful tips with you. I hope they come in handy for you as they have for me when photographing kids. With that said, until next time. Thank you for stopping by.

The Importance Of Client Pre-Consultation In Photography

When discussing photography or even videography, I like to separate them into two individual parts that both share a common interest but are completely different at the same time. The two sides are the creative side and the business or professional aspect of photography. The creative side as the name clearly states will appeal to all things creative and the creative process, while the business or professional side will speak to all things business related as the owner of your photography brand. The common interest shared between these parts is the desire to please their client and ensure they get what they are paying for. In this article, I will be sharing some points that will speak to the business aspect of photography and its importance. We will be discussing some key points as to why having a client pre-consultation as a photographer is very important not only to your business but to the client as well. Some of these points are pretty general and will still come in handy if you’re a videographer as well. Let us begin

What Is A Client Pre-Consultation?

If you’re a beginner in photography or completely new to running or building your own photography business then you will eventually learn the importance of client pre-consultations. A client pre-consultation is essentially a meeting between you and the client getting to know each other a little better and understanding what you both have to offer or envision for an upcoming session.

client consult

Client pre-consults are an amazing way to develop a strong sense of communication and transparency between you and your client and virtually be held anywhere. You can have a client pre-consultation at a coffee shop, your studio or even your place of business. As long as the environment is professional or conducive to business conversations and planning then it shouldn’t be a problem. Now that you have a clear understanding as to what a client pre-consultation is, let’s talk about some of the reasons why it is important.

1. Transparency

Having transparency with your clients can help to avoid a few simple problems leading up to the photography session or even right before it. Many times there are things that are not said or shared with the client as the photographer or not shared with the photographer by the client which inevitably ends up with someone being confused or uncertain as to what is happening. Some clients won’t always communicate everything they want or the idea they have in mind via email or a simple phone call when booking their session. Setting up a client pre-consult will give them the time to not only think about their ideas but write them down as well as a reminder to share them with you during the consultation. This also gives you time as well as the photographer to share some of your own ideas and see how your client feels about them moving forward. Understanding each other ideas and what is expected from the shoot is imperative to the session going as smooth as possible. Transparency is one of the many keys to having a smooth and productive photography session.

2. Developing Strong Communication

I’ve gradually learned that in everything you do, communication is key and will prevent many accidents or misunderstanding from happening down the road. Establishing a strong line of communication is important moving forward also depending on the type of photography you will be doing. For example, if you will be covering a wedding then it is a must you establish a strong line of communication from your client pre-consult until the wedding or event is finished. This strong line of communication will help to keep you up to date on any changes that may take place on the clients part or even if you have to make a few minor or major changes yourself.

client consult

3. Planning And Being Organized

My final point that speaks to the importance of doing a client pre-consultation is the role it plays in being organized and planning effectively. This is exemplified with weddings and when covering other large events. The pre-consult with give the client a chance to bring you up to date as to what the running order of the day will be like and what to expect. Based on what they’ve shared during this pre-consult in regards to the running order of the day will go, you can then organize and prepare yourself for the day ahead. As the photographer having knowledge of these things will better help you to pack the right equipment, create a shot list and also keep yourself organized and in check throughout the day.


Client pre-consults are just one of the things that will help to make your job a little easier as a photographer and also ensure that your client is satisfied and get exactly everything they needed from you. One of the keys to running great photography is the business is making sure your client is happy before, during and after you’ve completed the service they paid for. This ethic will help you to not only gain more clients or customers but also help to build a good reputation as well. I hope this article has inspired or helped you to learn some new tips as to why it’s important to host client pre-consult. It always a pleasure and I look forward to seeing you again very soon.

Useful Tips For Quality Indoor Sports Photography Sessions

Sports photography is probably one of the many thrilling genres of photography to be interested in. It can be filled with so much high intensity and not to mention some jaw-dropping action here and there to get your going or grab your interest. Sports photography can be particularly interesting if you have a thing for the sport you’re capturing but don’t get too distracted. We’ve spoken many times about sports photography and even photographing extreme sports. However, in this article, we will be talking a little about doing indoor sports photography. Sporting events won’t also be outside which means you won’t always have the help of natural light on your side to help you out. I will be sharing some useful tips that will come in handy when doing indoor sports photography to help you get some amazing shots. Let’s begin!

1. Know The Game

The first tip I have for you as a photography beginner in indoor sports photography is to have an idea what the game is about. Knowing the objective and rules of the game can help you so much in capturing great photographs. Having a quick overview of the game itself as well as some of the players or team history will help you get some more interesting shots during the game. Many times as sports photographers we end up not paying much attention to those key details that could be an asset to us. In addition to having an idea of the rules and some of the players in the game, It is also important to know some facts about the game overall for your own safety reasons.


Sports photography can sometimes require us to be very close to the action, for example, basketball. I’ve watched many basketball games and see players accidentally tumble over on to photographers or even just the people there to watch the game. Many of these people or photographers already knew the consequences of sitting so close to the action and as a result, know what to expect in the event anything happens. This will aid you to be careful, not only for yourself but also for your equipment as well. With that said, do your research before you head to the sporting event you’ll be covering.

2. Go Early

It is important to get there earlier than the fans who will even be watching the game when doing Indoor sports photography or photography overall. There are a few reasons why I would recommend doing this. One of those few reasons is that you get an early jump on the players warming up or doing the practice. This doesn’t only give you a chance to get some shots of them practicing but also gives you the chance to practice your shots as well and test the lighting around you.


I can’t tell you how many times I’ve shown up to a sporting event on time for the actual event to start and ended up missing or messing up some great shots because I didn’t get a chance to warm up myself and get prepared for the game or event ahead. Another reason why it is good to show up early is to get a good spot to shoot as well. You never really know how many photographers are going to be at this sporting event and it can be hassling to have to forcefully find a spot in a pool of photographers trying to get great shots like you. Getting there early will help you to secure a good spot and test out your best positions to shoot from so you get a great perspective and some variety in your images as well.

3. Have The Right Gear

Having the right gear during indoor sports photography is very important before you even leave home. Without the right equipment, it is easy to find yourself in a tough position not getting the shot you need for yourself or even your clients. In many cases, you will find where some gyms may look very well lit but don’t let this fool you as it’s a completely different ball game when it comes to being well lit for photography itself. Some of the things I pack in my camera bag for indoor sports photography are firstly my Speedlight flash that will come in handy If I have inadequate light where I am. I make sure to have at least 3 memory cards on my person because you never know how many shots you might be taking based on the intensity and importance of the game itself as some sporting event can be very popular which means you want to capture all the content you can without running out of space.


Having extra memory cards on your person, in general, is important as a sports photographer for this very reason. My next piece of equipment is the lenses I carry. I usually travel with just two lenses that have served me pretty well when it comes to sporting events, especially indoor ones.

The lenses of choice for me are the 24-70mm f/2.8 which is great for variety and some close shots here and there along with its aperture which is good for some situations in low light. I also have the 70-200mm as well to helps me get super close for some intense shots of players or even coaches during the game. With these lenses, I tend to capture a great variety and diversity in my shots that have proven to tell a great story each time. Depending on the sport, you might want to carry a tripod but do some research first as you don’t want to be traveling too heavy heading to a sporting event.


As always, it’s been fun sharing these very simple but useful tips with you for indoor sports photography. Until next time, take care.

If you don’t know if sports photography is for you, as a beginner in photography, you can always explore some of Sleeklens Photography Courses.

Common Mistakes Made Prior to Printing Photographs

In a previous article, we spoke a bit about some simple tips to take before going to print your photos. We discussed many things such as pixel, the paper of choice and even calibrating your monitor to the right settings so that you don’t end up having your prints looking totally different than what’s on your monitor. However, in this article, I will be sharing with you some of the simple but common mistakes that I have made my self when printing my images and only hope pointing out these mistakes will help you not only to learn from them but prevent you from making the same mistake as well.

1. Not Paying Attention To Pixels

When printing your images, one of the biggest mistakes you could make is not paying much attention to your pixel count. I know as photographers, some of us can get super excited about seeing our prints and end up not paying much attention to the fine details of making sure our prints come out at the best quality possible. We sometimes end up thinking as photography beginners that our images were taken with a good quality full frame camera so our prints should turn out good as well. This is a common misunderstanding that can result in us wasting ink or money on doing a print incorrectly. When preparing to print your images, you should always make sure that the print size you want will match up to the number of pixels in your image or images. If the pixels in your image does not match up to the print size you are looking for then you will end up with your image looking pixelated as a print or even blurry. The more pixels you have your image is the more you will see detail and quality in your shot when it’s printed. Don’t make this mistake and end up regretting not doing your research as I have.

2. Not Using The Right Paper

An important part of printing your photographs is having an idea of which paper to use. Using the right paper is almost as important as having an idea of the right print size in relation to the number of pixels in your photo. The type of paper you print your images on can have both a negative or positive effect on your image itself. Some images are edited in a particular way that might only look good on a certain type of paper and failure to use that paper might just make your print or image look less amazing than it actually is. Knowing your print paper will become an asset as you print more and more of your work during your photography career. When I first did my prints, I had no knowledge of what to expect or how paper even affected how my images look. I even though that all photographers used the same type of printing paper and there was nothing too complex about it at all but boy was I wrong. Before printing your images, do some research and get familiar with the different types of printing paper and they’re characteristics as the information will come in handy.

3. Image Format

Before printing, you should always take a look at the image format first before exporting or sending off your image or images to be printed. Many of us don’t pay much attention to this but it is indeed a very important factor in printing your work. Most printers that are used to do high-quality shots do not accept any other format than JPEG or TIFF. If you export your image in any other format than the two I just listed then you might be in a little problem as they might not work. When printing I recommend using a TIFF format for your images. The abbreviation TIFF stands for “Tagged Imaged File Format” and is the basic standard used by companies that print books and life-size images overall. The TIFF format carries a lot more information than that of the JPEG format and can work in your benefit when doing prints. Images in TIFF format are a lot less compressed that JPEG and will be useful when looking to keep the quality in your shots. Knowing the image format you’re using will play a key role in determining the quality of your prints and how much detail they will hold.

4. Choosing A Cheap Print Company

Cheaper isn’t always better and when it comes to your prints, this can be a very tricky thing. The first set of prints I ever did as a beginner in photography, I went the cost-effective route. Needless to say, while I was indeed excited and happy to actually see my work printed, I started to notice the quality in the print was not exactly what I expected or would hope for. Be very cautious of the prices you see and the companies you use. Some prices will be too good to be true and might not give you the quality print you want. If you want good prints of your work then you will have to invest in it and not always take the cheaper route.

It’s always fun to share some of these points with you and also share some experiences of my own to help understand the results of making these simple mistakes. Until next time, take care.

How to Print High-Quality Photos: Useful Tips for Best Quality

One of the most rewarding feelings a photographer could have is when we finally see our work printed. In a day and age where everything is so digital, you really find viewers or individuals appreciating prints as much as they should. Getting to know how to print high-quality photos happens to be a very important step in your career as a photographer. Not only does it make you a better photographer but it also makes you a better editor as well.

Printing your work helps to show the details that were overlooked during post-production and will motivate you to pay more attention to finer things. It also makes you a better photographer as well. I’ve noticed since my first time printing my images for an exhibition that I changed my style of shooting a bit in regards to my composition and the way I focus on my subject. However, in this article, we will not be talking about the benefits of printing your work but rather useful tips for printing some of your images. These tips should come in handy before you print your images.

1. Understanding Pixels

One of the key things to discovering how to print a high-quality photo is making sure your pixels are correct. This is what helps to separate a good print from a bad print. The more pixels available in your image is the better the quality of the print and the more you have the potential to make a bigger print without losing quality or having your image look pixelated. Before you head to your local print shop or print your images at home.


Try to be mindful of the pixels in your image before choosing a print size. If the print size does not match up to the pixels in your image then you will end up with a distorted, blurred or pixelated print which would be a waste of ink or money. If you’re not sure if your pixels match up to the print size you want then don’t be scared to ask a few questions or do some research to make sure you have the correct size for your pixel count. The first time I printed my images, I was completely lost in this regard and just wanted to see my work actually printed. Regardless of being happy that I actually got to saw prints of my work, I was also bothered by the look of my images as some of them looked very pixelated.

2. Choosing The Right Paper

The paper you choose to put your images on can also play a huge part in the result of your prints itself. You want to make sure you’ve tested and seen each option of printing paper before making your choice. This paper can either help to enhance your images or make them look less amazing than what they are. I have personally never experienced this but I can say I have seen other photographers make this mistake and immediately regret the choice they made so be careful. When it comes to printing images, there are three major types of paper that can be used. The first of the three is called Luster Paper. This paper is popular among many photographers when it comes to printing their work. It generally offers a very vibrant glossy look with color and has a texture that is useful in hiding things like minor scratches or scuffs. The type of paper is popular amongst photographers because it doesn’t give off much of glare or shine and is helpful when looking at the print from different angles.

how to print high quality photos

The second type of printing paper is Glossy paper. This type of paper is popular as well but not used too commonly by photographers. It lives up to its name and can be very shiny and give off a glare when you look at it. However, it does provide a fancy look with a very high quality feel to it. In regards to the print itself, it helps your print to appear much brighter and helps to enhance colors as well. Lastly is the Metallic Paper. This paper is probably one of my personal favorites to print my work as it is very cost effective along with its capability of helping to make my work pop just a bit more and making it unique in its own way.

Always take into consideration the type of paper you’re using for your prints first and how you’d like your print to look. The paper you choose can help to make or break your image itself so always be mindful of the characteristics of each.

3. Correct Your Monitor Settings

Calibrating your monitor to the right settings is very important when you’re interested in printing your Images. The colors seen on your screen can easily look different when printed on any of the papers mentioned above so you might want to make sure you have the right settings before you go ahead with exporting your selection of images to be printed.

I hope these tips have been useful in making sure you get some pretty amazing prints when you do decide to do so. It’s always a pleasure sharing some of these simple tips with you and I look forward to seeing you again very soon.

5 Easy Tips For Photographing Street Markets

Culture is a very beautiful thing and it always amazes me how different people can share similar culture but be from two completely different places. During my time living in Jamaica as a child and even as a young adult, I grew to appreciate the different cultures around me and respect them as I would like my Jamaican culture to be respected. Growing up and living in Jamaica I would usually get to experience a lot of things that I thought we unique to my country alone. One of these things were going to the market on Sundays with your mom or parents to help them get groceries or produce at a cheaper cost than what you would find in the supermarket. This was something done by the adults in almost every Jamaican family. As I got older and did a lot more traveling to different countries within the Caribbean and North America, I began to see some similarities. One of the few things I found very similar from we do back home is the ritual of going to the market. Markets are very fast paced places where you will find some of the most interesting or intriguing things as a photographer. It is filled with color, noise and culture you will eventually appreciate. In this article, I wanted to share some tips that will come in handy if you ever decide to visit a Street Market and capture some shots. Thes tips will be short and to the point but I do hope they come in very handy if you ever decide to explore a market yourself and capture some great moments.

1. Define What Is Interesting

Usually, when you go to a street market you are bound to see an abundance of fruits or vegetables to offer you some color in your images. However, you will not always find this in every street market as each street market can be different in their own way and have different characteristics. If you don’t find all the colors you’re looking for at the street market then that doesn’t mean you should leave.

street market

You can make use of the things you have around you and make them interesting in your own way. Not all photographers or viewers will see things from your perspective and that can work to your advantage in many ways more than one. Redefine what is interesting and make that your strong point when traveling through a street market.

2. Include Strangers

You will see some pretty interesting people in the street market that are not only vendors but buyers as well. Capturing these candid moments of different strangers will make your images that more interesting and aid in telling a story as well. I have spotted so many interesting individuals in the street market and couldn’t help but to capture a frame of them and that made for some of my best work in this genre of photography.

street market

You can always feel free to ask for permission before snapping a photo of these strangers but I usually just go for it without asking because they never really notice. I do this especially if its a busy day in the market with a considerably larger number of people moving around. This makes it so easy to blend into the background with your camera and barely be seen or heard. When it comes to capturing strangers in the street market, try not to be too worried as some of them are too focused on what they’re looking for to notice you anyway. This will work to your advantage.

3. Buy Something

Showing support in whatever way you can to the vendors is always respected and appreciated. Some of these vendors are out on the street selling their products or creations on a daily basis to make a suitable living for themselves or maybe their family as well. Take into consideration the work they put into what they doing and pick up something just to show some appreciation for what they’re doing. Showing this appreciation will encourage to also show appreciation to you by allowing you to capture a photo of them or giving you consent to take some pictures of their products or Items.

4. Having The Right Gear

When doing Street Market photography, I would advise you to travel light if possible. Street Market photography is similar in some ways to Street Photography or Urban Photography as they all share some of the same characteristics. Carrying a bunch of gear that you more than likely won’t need will make your time practicing or doing street market photography a lot more annoying and draining than you anticipated. As I mentioned earlier, depending on the day, the street market can get pretty busy. This will result in a bunch of strangers basically in a rush to get the best product or items they can before it’s all gone. Usually, when I’m doing street market photography, I travel with a few extra batteries in my backpack or back pocket with my camera and a prime lens mounted on. The prime lens of choice for me doing Street Market photography is between the 50mm f/1.8 or a 35mm lens. Both of them come in pretty handy and produce great images so it is pretty much all up to you as to what your preference is in focal length.

5. Get Variety

Having variety in your shots is very important as you don’t want to become repetitive or have your work start to seem very predictable. As much as possible, change up your angles and perspective to give your viewers a better picture or story as to what you experienced. Remember, as photographers, we are storytellers for those who did not get to experience these things themselves.

street market

It’s been such a pleasure sharing these quick and short tips with you to help you capture some amazing images when doing street market photography. Until next time, Take care and remember to always have fun.

Photographing Flowers: A Beginners Guide

When I was a beginner just like you, flowers were some of the first things I learned to photograph. My mother had a beautiful garden at the side of our house that always caught my eye. One day as a young teenager, I eventually picked up a camera my step-father had laying around and decided to try taking some pictures. I had no idea I would enjoy it so much to the point that I have made a career out of it as well as make it my duty to teach others some of the things I have learned. Photographing flowers is a very simple art form in photography as your subject is not too complex but beautiful nonetheless. The art is in the colors and the characteristics of each flower itself as they are all different in their own way. As a beginner, I learned to identify the difference and exploit them accordingly through the pictures I took. After practicing during my spare time in summer as a kid, I slowly learned how to appreciate both plants and photography for their beauty. In this article, I will be sharing some of the useful tips I’ve learned when I started Flower photography. I hope these tips will come in very useful to you as a beginner and serve to be an asset as they have been to me. Let’s begin

1. Macro Photography

A huge part of flower photography is learning how to effectively do macro photography as well. I’ve written previous articles on macro photography before but to give you a quick overview as to it is, is very easy. Macro photography is pretty much getting very close to your subject to the point they almost seem life-size once the image is taken. Macro photography pays a lot of attention to detail or rather the finer things that are usually overlooked or disregarded by others. For example, a regular individual will pass a flower and notice the bees or pollen on it but rather carry on with their day. As a photographer looking to excel in flower photography, that would be an amazing frame to capture. Macro Photography could be considered probably the heartbeat of photographing flowers as you can see all the beauty up close rather than far away.


If you are worried about having a macro lens as a beginner then you don’t need to worry too much. Most lenses have a macro limit as to how close they can get to a subject before your lens starts to go crazy trying to find a focusing point. If you’re indeed a beginner then I will assume you have a kit lens which should be capable of doing some macro photography as well. There are many macro lenses on the market that will come in handy when you’re further down in your career as a photographer but for now, you don’t have to worry about getting one too much. The first step to coming to a good photographer is practice and learning the type of photographer you are as well as learning more about your camera itself.

2. Playing With Colors

Most if not all flowers are usually noticed and categorized for their colors as well as other characteristics. As the photographer, you can use these colors to your advantage and make them capture the attention of your viewers as well. Most flowers don’t usually stand alone so if possible you should also capture them in their abundance for some diversity in your shots. Great vibrant colors in Floral photography is what stands out the most and will help you create a beautiful portfolio given that this is the genre of photography for you.


3. Change Your Perspective

Changing up your perspective while photographing flowers is always a good thing. You can only take so much macro photography or close up shots of a flower without them all eventually looking the same. Changing up your perspective with help to add some diversity and make your shots a bit more interesting. Let’s face it, floral photography will only grab the interest of some viewers for so long and no more because some of them have already seen it all or know what to expect when it comes to capturing pictures of plants. Make an effort to prove them wrong and introduce a new way of experiencing floral photography through your eyes. Being different or unique is important as it sets you apart from the rest. Let your creativity pour through your lens and into the laps of viewers so they can experience what you see.


Photographing flowers has been a pretty simple task but there is so much that can be done with the right creative mind and appreciation for the art itself. As always, its been a true pleasure sharing these tips with you and hope you grow to love floral photography as a beginner and make seek to make it an asset in your future photography career.

Tips On Taking Better Bridal Portraits

When it comes to weddings, as photographers we have to remember that even though it’s an event for the newlywed couple, it’s still the bride’s day. Bridal Portraits has been something practiced by many photographers over the years. These used to be something taken or done only in a studio until technology took it’s toll and made us able to walk around with cameras that can fit in the palm of our hand. In this article, I will be sharing a few quick and short tips I have learned when taking bridal portraits and how you can make them a bit better. Wedding photography is always so graceful and majestic but nonetheless very hectic and will have you on your feet until the entire event is done. Bridal portraits and shots of the couple are probably some of the most important shots you will be taking during the day of the wedding. How you execute these shots are very crucial in keeping not only the bride happy but the groom as well. Most brides tend to be very specific or meticulous when it comes to the images and their wedding day overall. While others may just be happy to finally get married to the person they love. When it comes to bridal photography, here are some of the key things to consider to make your portraits a little better.

1. Keep It Simple

It’s probably already been a long day of getting her hair and makeup done while also managing everyone else in her bridal party so you don’t want to have the bride doing too much. With built up anticipation and excitement leading up to the day of her wedding, most brides are happy to finally be married but also happy to get it over with and look forward to her honeymoon. When doing bridal portraits you want to keep everything as simple as possible so that the bride doesn’t get too bothered or miserable during those few moments. Anything that might take too much effort on her part or risky should not be considered.

bridal portrait

There is beauty in simplicity and keeping your background or your frame itself very simple and minimalistic will help you in having the image more focused and centered around her. When it comes to bridal portraits, the bride is obviously the star of the show and every way possible, you want to make sure you exemplify that in your images. With simple compositions and a very minimalistic frame, you will find yourself taking more captivating portraits so don’t be scared to give it a try.

2. Get Her Relaxed

One of the keys to taking amazing bridal portraits is to put the bride first and make sure she’s comfortable. A comfortable bride who is relaxed is much easier to shoot than that of one who’s probably very tense and miserable with everything that’s going on. Crack a few jokes if possible to have her smiling or ask her a few positive questions in regard to how she met her groom.

bridal portrait

These moments give you the opportunity to have her forget that you’re even there taking pictures and help you to capture so raw emotion. In a previous article, we spoke a bit about capturing emotion through your images and these are one of the key things that can be used in bridal photography as well. Genuine moments are the best and can be evident through any image you take so try to create the right environment for this. Also be careful, because you don’t want to have the bride smiling and laughing too much and have the groom a bit worried.

3. Shoot By A Window

There is nothing better than having some soft natural light shining right on to your subject. Photographing your bride near a window will give you a great light source so you can finally turn the flash off. This is usually a challenge when photographing brides indoors as there’s sometimes not enough light to capture the image you need.

bridal portrait

Don’t get me wrong, there is absolutely nothing wrong with using a flash in bridal or wedding photography overall but it just doesn’t beat the advantages of shooting in natural light. Shooting by a window also helps to create a certain look in your portraits when the light is shining onto the bride. It almost looks angelic with her white dress and captivating beauty.

4. Get Close

My last tip to you would be to get a little close during your portrait sessions with the bride to capture some detail. There is so much detail to get when a bride is completely dressed and ready as they invest a lot of time in the selection of their pieces. Get close and capture some of the detail in her dress, makeup and hair as much as possible. She will, later on, appreciate the attention to detail you showed in regards to the little things the put effort into for her big day.

Doing bridal portraits are always fun once you have a solid plan or an idea of what to look for and what to do. Sharing these simple and very short tips with you has been a pleasure and I hope they help you as much as they’ve helped me. It’s time for me to go so until next time, take care.

How To Capture Emotion In Photography: A Beginner’s Guide

Storytelling is a huge part of photography as it aids in making your images that more interesting and appealing to viewers. We can tell these stories in various ways through a series of images or through one image alone. Regardless of the way you choose, a story can be told through different elements in your photo. One of the key elements which we will be discussing today is the element of emotion. Sharing emotions through your images without having to explain them is a very powerful thing to do as a photographer. Viewers tend to appreciate what they can feel when they look at an image especially if they’re a creative as well. Emotions help to form a special bond between the viewers and the images you take as well as the talent or individuals in the images themselves. Each time we close the shutter button, we are capturing a unique moment in time that cannot easily be replicated or replaced. It’s the uniqueness in these frames that help us to appreciate them a lot more. In this article, I will be sharing a few ways in which we can capture emotions in our images and make them unique so that they can be enjoyed not only by your viewers but even by yourself as well.

Tip #1: Put Your Subjects In A Familiar Environment

The first step in evoking genuine emotions in an image is to place your subject or talents in a space that they’re either used to or comfortable in. This helps in cases where you’re photographing a couple or even a few family members. Familiar environments help to ease any tension that might exist during the session and have them forget that you’re even there taking photos. Ask your subjects interesting questions that will spark a good conversation not only between all of you but between them both as well. You will eventually get quiet and allow them to share their responses with each other while you capture the moment between them both. I sometimes consider this a little trick of mine to get couples into sharing their story or a family to start interacting with each other.


If you’re capturing only one person then you will still use the same method as to have them talk about certain topics that interest them or what motivated them to want to do the shoot overall. Many people who do shoots for themselves have a deeper reason behind it as to what pushed them. If possible, figure out what that reason is and use that in addition to the comfortable environment to have them show some true emotion on camera.

Tip #2: Do Not Intervene

Once you acknowledge that the couple, family or individual is in the right state of mind and sharing their emotions, I would urge you not to say anything but rather just observe and capture the moment as much as possible. You don’t want to be cutting them during a vulnerable or important moment just to have them fix the position of their hand or head. This might just end up ruining the mood you’ve tried to create and leave you having to start over from scratch or losing all the shots you could’ve gotten.


Take into consideration not many people are very expressive or show emotions easily, so if you’re privileged enough to witness that, it should be cherished. If guidance is needed to your subject, try to do so very subtle and not too harsh. If the guidance is not something that is too important then try to adjust and not make it an issue.

Tip #3: Focus On The Eyes

As a child, I was always told that eyes are the windows to the soul or I would read similar lines in books. As I grew up started to interact with other individuals and found a career in photography, I began to realize it was a known fact. Eyes can convey a lot more emotions than you expected in your images. A person can easily smile in a shot but they’re eyes tell a different story and this has been exemplified in images I have taken. However, If by chance the eyes of the subject or subjects are closed due to some emotion such as laughter or sadness then that’s fine. Still, capturing the shot as it will come in handy later and add some variety to everything you’ve taken.

Tip #4: Don’t Stop Shooting

Deciding to shoot continuously will help you to capture a bunch of various moments between the individuals in your frame. Sometimes emotions can take very sharp and sudden turns so you never really know what to expect. A moment can change from being sad to a moment of pure happiness and jokes. Make sure your camera is set to continuous shooting and don’t be scared to fire away while your subjects have their own moment.

Tip #5: Zoom In Or Get Close

You might want to get in close sometimes when capturing emotion as the closer you get is more its amplified in the Images. Having very vivid details will help to not only speak to the quality of your work but help the viewer have a clear understanding of what emotion was happening at that moment. I usually recommend using one of two lenses in this case. The first lens I will recommend is the 85mm f/1.8 due to its crazy Isolation while providing a well-blurred background. The second lens would be the 24-70mm f/2.8 to give you some variety in focal length depending on how close or far your subject or subjects is.


It’s been a pleasure sharing these simple but very useful tips with you and I do hope they come in handy when trying to capture emotions during your sessions. Until next time, take care.

Common Mistakes Made In Newborn Photography

Children are so precious, filled with energy and joy in their eyes. As photographers, capturing the moments leading up to and after their birth is such a privilege for parents to share with us. These moments are filled with so much happiness and a flood of emotion everywhere that is not often experienced by others. Capturing newborns is one of the elements in photography that I will always cherish even if for some reason I am not able to do photography tomorrow. Filled with innocence and promising life ahead doing photography with these tiny humans is nothing short of exciting.

When I first tried Newborn photography as I was very nervous as I was worried if the mother or couple would like the images taken or not. Being nervous only helped me to make a few mistakes which I noticed long after doing my first session. In this article, I will be sharing some of the mistakes I’ve made in the past and some recently in hopes that you don’t make the same mistakes as well or learn from the mistakes I’ve made as a fellow photographer. Let’s get started!

Mistake #1: Don’t Compare Yourself To Others

One of the first mistakes I made as a beginner in newborn photography is setting the bar high for myself by comparing my work with others. This can be a huge problem if not handled or fixed urgently. We often see examples online of the work produced by other photographers and subconsciously place these standards on yourself and believe if we don’t produce something remotely similar to the example we saw before then the image is not good enough. This will hinder your process of creating natural and let everything seem forced during your session. Take a deep breath and remember who is as a photographer and what you are capable of creating.


Let your creativity take the driver’s seat and throw all that anticipation and nervousness in the back. There are never two people who are completely the same, not even twins so never try to be like others or compare yourself to them too often. Doing this will dim your light and have you feeling less than you are.

Mistake #2: Not Being Patient Enough

When it comes to kids, no matter what age they are, you always need to have patience. These newborn are not models from an agency and have no idea what’s even happening. The pictures you see taken by other photographers took some time and didn’t get done in just a few minutes. Prepare yourself to work for a few hours until you get the shots you need to make the parents happy. Patience will always yield good rewards so don’t be in too much of a rush to get the session over with as the images you want will eventually come.

Mistake #3: Communication

This is a very regretful mistake I made when I first did newborn photography as I assumed a lot and didn’t ask enough questions or communicate with the couple or mother themselves. I made the mistake of assuming that all newborn photography is pretty much the same and has a general setting or theme that does not need much planning. I was completely wrong when I realized that the couple was not completely sold on the setting or theme I had which then resulted in me having to change a few things around to match their desire.


Make sure to develop a line of communication with the mother or parents themselves to get an understanding of what it is exactly they want or the vision they have in mind. Once this is done, you can easily share different ideas until one is agreed upon heading up to the date of the shoot for a very smooth session. This transparency helps to prevent any misunderstanding between yourself and the client and also to not waste any time changing stuff on the shoot itself.

Mistake #4: Not Getting Siblings Involved

Siblings can be such great helpers during the photography of a newborn as they are as equally excited as the mother or father to have a new addition to the family. If a young sibling is available then make an effort to have them involved in different frames as much as possible. These toddlers will have a little understanding of what’s going on and you’d be surprised to see how much they can direct the shoot for you to help get some adorable shots. Make the younger sibling your little helper and have them help you with simple things so they feel as if they truly are a part of the shoot and not just there to take pictures with the newborn. Toddlers often like to be given an objective or a duty so be sure to give them a few.


Once you’ve taken note of some of these simple mistakes then it’s easy to make sure you don’t make them yourself. I hope this article has been some help in guiding you as a beginner in Newborn photography and I hope to see you again soon.

Benefits Of Having A Gorillapod in Your Travel Bag

As cameras start to improve at a very rapid pace faster than we can keep up, so does the accessories or tools around them. More frequently we begin to see upgrades in tools for our DSLR, mirrorless and even smartphone camera to help improve our quality of work or even make it a little easier. We will be talking about one of those tools today and discussing a little bit as to how it can help your quality of work get better but also just the overall benefits of having one of these on you. The tool we will be discussing is what is called a gorilla pod. Some of you may already know what it is or even have one yourself as it has grown very popular amongst photographers and videographers over a period of time. With that said, let’s begin.

1. Travel-Friendly

As a photographer who’s always on the move both internationally and sometimes locally, it’s always good to have tools or equipment that are very easy to take with you. The Gorilla pod fits right into that category is probably one of my favorite things to just pick up and go with. Depending on the size of your camera bag or backpack, it can easily fit without having to damage or force anything else to fit. As opposed to a tripod it’s not a hassle to carry around with you.

travel photography

2. Weight

Contrary to its name, a gorilla pod is not a very heavy piece of equipment to have around. In comparison to a lot of tripods that are made out of metal or even rubber, the gorilla pod is definitely not too heavy. This comes in handy when on the move and not wanting to have too much weight on your back or just not wanting to travel with too much weight at all. The weight convenience of this thing pretty much allows you to just walk with it in your hand if you want to. Gorilla pods come in different sizes which are all relatively small and not too bulky. Given their small size they don’t carry much weight on them. As photographers, this is something we always want to take into consideration since most if not all of our job is spent on our feet and a very small percentage is probably spent in other positions to get our shot. Nonetheless, we want to limit our weight as much as possible so that we don’t get uncomfortable or annoyed while we are shooting.

3. Flexibility

This is one of the features that made this little piece of equipment very popular for some photographer and videographers. The flexibility of this thing changed the whole game in regards to capturing different perspective and getting creative with your angles. The legs on the Gorilla Pod are capable of being bent and wrapped around almost anything while still holding your camera or smartphone in place. Of course, you will have to be careful when doing this to make sure it has a firm grip on whatever it is it’s holding on to, to prevent it from falling. I can only imagine having to replace a whole camera due to a bad turn of events.


In addition to it being flexible, there are some Gorillapods that also offer magnetic capabilities. These come in handy when trying to stabilize or ensuring your Gorillapod is stabilized enough against any metal surfaces.

4. Balance

It is relatively easy to balance a Gorillapod as the legs are easily adjustable and can be bent into different forms or shapes to stabilize your camera a bit more. You may often find yourself using lenses that are a bit heavier than your camera and can throw your Gorillapod off balance but when you see this happening, simply adjust the legs for it to become more stable.

5. Size

Size always matters and can be a huge plus or minus depending on the setting it is in. The size of a Gorillapod helps in drawing too much attention to yourself when shooting or trying to capture a clip in public. With regular tripods, you find yourself having to do a little bit of work with extending the legs and locking them in place which can sometimes draw attention. With a Gorillapod, it actually looks like a toy so you will find that not many people will be paying attention to you when trying to set up a shot in public or when trying to capture a clip of yourself. This also made it pretty popular amongst YouTubers or Vloggers when capturing videos about their day to day life.

I hope these quick but simple benefits have motivated you to go get your own Gorillapod and enjoy the advantages as well. It is always a pleasure sharing these points with you and I look forward to doing it again. Cheers!

Common Mistakes Made In Concert Photography

Concert photography can be very rewarding as it comes with both the experience of enjoying the concert itself, especially if it’s an artist or band you love as well as capturing the moment. Many photographers tend to not be too fond of concert photography because it can be such a fast-paced, low light form of photography. This can sometimes be very difficult too especially if you’re a beginner in photography and don’t have too much experience in the field. In the early stages of my photography career doing concert photography, I made a few very simple mistakes that I have observed are being made by others as well. In this article, I will be listing some of those mistakes and the important step we can make towards fixing them or making sure they don’t happen. Without drawing this intro out for too long, let us begin.

Mistake #1: Wrong Lens Choice

The first mistake some of us make when heading to an event to practice or do concert photography is pretty much packing the wrong lens in our camera bag or mounting the wrong lens on to our camera. Many photographers think that to get great concert shots we need to have a long telephoto lens. Well, this subjective to the time of day this concert will be held as you do have concerts that take place in the day as well and what the lighting situation might be. In most cases, you’re guaranteed to end up in a low light situation and you will need a lens that is capable of managing this situation effectively enough to give you good results. The mistake some of us make is taking a telephoto lens with a smaller than needed aperture hoping it will survive the situation well when in some cases it doesn’t because of the size and other technical disadvantages.


When doing concert photography I recommend using one of two lenses that will yield some beautiful images. The first lens I recommend is my personal favorite which is the 50mm f/1.8 due to its great size, wide open aperture and its capabilities to capture a subject fast enough while also adding a nice bokeh to the shot as well. A 50mm mounted on almost any camera is easy to carry around and use in the field so you will find yourself a lot more comfortable with this lens than that of a huge telephoto lens. The second lens I would recommend is the 85mm f/1.8 as it carries some of the same features as the 50mm in regards to size, focal length and adding a stunning blurred background which pretty much applies the isolation of your subject. Make sure to pack a lens with a great focal length and wide enough aperture for low light at a concert or else you will find yourself struggling to get good shots.

Mistake #2: Shutter Not Fast Enough

Concerts are usually very hyperactive. Depending on the genre of music or the type of band or artist it is, the frequency of these movements can be very unpredictable. For example, if you intend to photograph or document a concert of a band that is known for soulful jazz music then you might not find much movement in the performance as opposed to someone performing at a rock concert. If our shutter speed is not as fast as it needs to be, we can easily find yourself capturing a lot of motion blur in your images. This will easily ruin what could’ve been a good shot and leave you having to try again.


When doing concert photography, make sure to have your shutter speed at a high enough value that it can create a well-composed freeze frame with an edge to edge sharpness. To help get this done, I would recommend getting to the concert a bit early if possible. This is not only to get a good spot in the crowd or amongst the other photographer but to rather get your settings right first before the concert begins. This helped me to be a lot more prepared after my first few tries at concert photography and I know it will come in handy for you as well.

Mistake #3: ISO Too Low

With a high shutter speed in low light, we have to adjust our settings to compensate for that. Having a high ISO is not something that many photographers are a fan of as it introduces the chance of having noise in your image. However, this depends on the type of camera you’re shooting with for many reasons. If you are shooting with a crop sensor camera then a high ISO may have more of an effect on your images than a photographer who is using a full frame camera. A high ISO on full frame camera will not affect your images too much with noise and even if so you can easily decrease noise in your images through Lightroom or even Photoshop. Make no mistake you will need to have a high enough ISO to help add some more artificial light or rather make your sensor a bit more sensitive. This will help to compensate for the high shutter speed along with your wide open aperture.


I hope these simple tips have been a great help to you and will come in useful when doing concert photography. As always, I’m thankful for you stopping by and look forward to seeing you again very soon.

How To Photograph Strangers While Traveling

The art of photography presents us with many challenges once we’ve made it into a career. As a photographer you often find yourself exploring places and meeting people you probably had no idea you’d ever meet in this lifetime but through the career path, you chose you’ve crossed that bridge. One of my biggest fears as a photographer was that I had to learn how to effectively and properly interact with the people I would need to work with. I also had to learn how to introduce myself and share my story with others as to how I became the photographer I am today and what made me choose this career path. This was a huge challenge for me because I was always an introvert and was never a social person but It’s something I eventually had to overcome.

Another challenge I faced was photographing or interacting with strangers when doing street or urban photography. Everyone is different and you’re never too sure how someone might react to you as the photographer or your camera but you try to capture a candid nonetheless. Over the years I gradually learned how to photograph strangers without them even knowing sometimes. The techniques are learned have proven to be an asset not only in street and urban photography but when capturing candids overall. In this article, I will be sharing some of those skills and techniques with you in the hope that they become an asset to creativity as they have to mine.

1. Be Prepared

The first thing you want to make sure you do is that both you and your camera are prepared to get the job done. Lighting can change constantly depending on where you’re shooting or the time of day. If you’re shooting in the late afternoon then you may find your light is fading a lot quicker than you may have anticipated but if you’re capturing images in the morning or midday then you should have an almost consistent source of light on your subject. Take a look at your settings and take a few test shots while you’re at it but not of the stranger. Once you’ve reviewed your test shots and gotten your settings correctly then you can start to take into consideration how you’re going to go about capturing your shot and what composition you’re looking to get.
Another part of being prepared is getting your courage in the right place. It’s sometimes so easy to give in to our fears but we have to give yourself a pep talk here and there and remind ourselves that we are capable of doing anything we put our mind to and should not let simple fears hold us back. Once you’ve done this, you’re ready to go.

2. Shoot From The Hip

After mustering up all the courage you need to go ahead and take the photo, I’ve also found a way to make it less suspicious as well. This technique might take a little practice but rest assured it is rewarding once you’ve practiced it enough and know how to do it well. When walking on the street during urban or street photography, as photographers we usually have our camera in our hand or around our necks.


When we see a potential shot, we then move the camera up to our faces where we then compose the shot and press our shutter release button. The time we use between establishing our shot and getting the camera up to our eyes can draw attention to us or create the opportunity for us to miss the shot itself. Shooting from the hip will save all that time and not make you subject any wiser that you’re capturing a photo of them. The general understanding of how photographers should look by other individuals is that we walk around with a backpack filled with equipment and a camera in our hands with a huge lens. To some extent, this is obviously true and most of us can easily fit into this cliche but when photographing strangers you want to do the complete opposite.

3. Shoot Wide

Sometime when trying to photograph strangers it’s best to shoot at a wide angle. This gives you enough space in your frame to crop the shot if you please during post-production. In the article on what to pack for urban photography, I mentioned some of the key lenses to have on your person. One of these lenses were the 24mm f/2.8 or more popularly known as the pancake lens. Depending on the setting you will be in, a 24mm can work just perfect or be a bit too wide for your liking. If you find that the focal length is too wide you then you can consider using a 50mm f/1.8 which will also work perfectly given that you distance yourself accordingly from the subject while leaving room on the edges from cropping.


Photographing strangers should be considered an extreme sport in photography as we take so many risks trying to capture different people with so many different personalities in their own element without them knowing we’re doing it. As always it’s been a pleasure sharing a little bit of these techniques with you and I look forward to seeing you again.

What To Pack For Amazing Urban Photography Adventures

The essence of urban photography is documenting the unique things happening in front of and around you as you travel. These images can sometimes yield some interesting stories and have the potential to be pure gold. In a previous article, we spoke a bit about the common mistake made when starting urban photography and how we can overcome them. One of my points during my article was to travel light when doing urban photography. In this article, I will be sharing with you some detail of the things to have in your camera bag when starting or practicing urban photography. The gears listed in this article are subjective to your style of photography but will generally come in handy if you’re a beginner or a professional. Let’s begin!

1. Lens Choice

When it comes to doing urban photography, most of your shot’s might be candids of different strangers that are clearly unaware of what you’ve done. To successfully do this, you need to make sure you’re not too noticeable or draw attention to yourself. Nothing screams photographer more than having a huge telephoto lens mounted on to your camera or using a flash. To blend in during urban photography, I recommend using one of these three lenses. The first lens I will recommend it what’s popularly known as the pancake lens which is your 24mm f/2.8. This focal length is pretty wide so if you’re looking to capture some great wide angle shots that day then this is your go-to lens. The 24mm lives up to its nickname and is pretty flat like that of a pancake but this works in your favor when it comes blending it. I can promise you that no one will notice you’re taking a picture of them with a 24mm mounted on to your camera.

The second lens I would recommend is one of my favorites which is the 50mm f/1.8. The 50mm f/1.4 is amazing as well but the choice is yours depending on how wide you need your aperture to be when doing low light photography. I don’t do that much low light photography in urban settings so I pretty much stick to using my 50mm f/1.8. The 50mm is a great focal length to shoot at when doing urban or street photography as it creates great portraits with a noticeably nice bokeh that adds an extra layer of beauty to your images. The 50mm is twice the size of the 24mm while still being unnoticeable to strangers when doing candids. In my opinion, this is one of the go-to lenses for urban photography as it can all around produce some great work.

urban photography

The last but not least on the list of lenses to pack in your camera bag is the cousin of the 50mm which is the 85mm f/1.8. This lens is a little bit bigger than the 50mm but it is definitely not nearly twice the size. It produces great images with amazing bokeh and the craziest subject isolation. With any or all three of these lenses in your camera bag, you’re bound to create some magic.

2. Extra Batteries

You can never lose with packing some extra batteries in your bag. Many times, I’ve ended up shooting longer than I expected and from my bad experiences, I ended up missing some amazing shots due to me being unprepared and not carrying extra batteries. When doing urban photography, you can never tell what might happen at the last minute when you thought you’d be done shooting so it’s always better to be too prepared than to be sorry. There is also the option of considering a battery grip for your DSLR or mirrorless camera as well. I can’t give a general cost of them as they all vary depending on the type of camera you’re using. Some photographers are against using them as they make your camera much bulkier and also adds some additional weight. Nonetheless, it gives you the capability of using two batteries at once which will save you from having to pack batteries in your bag while it extends the duration of which you can use the camera throughout the day.

3. Extra Memory

Make sure to always travel with extra memory cards as well so you don’t end up in a situation where you have to be deleting old shots to store new ones. This can be very time consuming and stressful when doing urban photography or any other genre of photography overall. In addition to that, the time taken to scroll through and delete the old images on your camera will hinder your process of capturing key shots right in front of you and reward you with only a bunch of missed opportunities. Don’t make the same mistake I did and not pack extra memory cards.

urban photography

It’s always best to travel light when doing urban photography as a lot of equipment will only slow you down and not serve any good use. Keeping it simple and traveling light will work in your favor in many ways. It’s always a pleasure sharing some key tips and tricks with you and I look forward to seeing you again. Thank you!

How To Conquer Your Fears In Photography

After being in the field of photography for about 7 years, there are still times where I get butterflies and feel nervous before a shoot depending on the nature of them. As photographers, it is very natural for us to be afraid of certain thing within our craft or even second guess ourselves but what counts the most is how exactly you deal with these issues. As someone who has and still does deal with fears in photography, I will be sharing some of the key tips I use personally to help me overcome or conquer my fears when shooting or before I start a session. Let’s dive in.

1. Stop Second-Guessing Yourself

This is one of the first steps in the wrong direction when trying to get over your fears in photography. We often develop a habit of questioning our capabilities to complete a certain project before even giving it a try. This often stems from us not believing that we can do what is needed to make something as great as the client or talent is asking for. By second-guessing yourself like this, you’ve not only started to fail but you’ve already failed.


Instead of asking yourself if you’re capable of doing something, start to question yourself and ask what it is exactly that is stopping you from doing it. Once you acknowledge the obstacles ahead of you to complete a project, the easier it gets to jump over these obstacles. As creatives, we are all capable of doing or rather creating anything we want to. Our capabilities are only limited by our imagination and not by anything else.

2. Comparing Yourself To Others

After second guessing yourself, you usually end up trying to compare yourself or your work to someone else’s. There is a thin line between admiration and comparison. While it is always good to admire the work of another photographer, it is unhealthy to begin to compare yourself to them. As photographers, we are all different in our style of shooting as well as our edits, in addition to that we also have different levels of experience within the field. So for example as a beginner, you cannot or rather should not try to compare yourself or work to photography who’s been in the field for almost 6 years.


The level of experience is different which means the quality of work will also be different as well. You can slowly but surely overcome this by reminding yourself on a daily basis that everyone has the same 24 hours each day it’s how you spend your own 24 hours that counts. There is nothing stopping you from being as great as or even better than the photographer you compare yourself to or even admire. However, if you want to be like them or better than them, then it all starts with taking the steps in the right direction and acknowledging the gift and passion you have for the art of photography.

3. Devaluing Your Work

I can personally say I have fallen in this trap many times and sometimes even convinced by others who didn’t have my best interest at heart that my work wasn’t as good as someone else. This can often hurt and even demotivate you from even continuing photography but you shouldn’t give up that easy or give into comments like these so quickly. There is a huge difference between good and bad criticism which you should gradually be able to see. If very normal to be your own critique as well but use that energy to become better and not to run away from the issue at hand.


Some of the greatest photographers of our time were not as good as they are now but they decided to dedicate their time into getting better and growing more into their craft. Greatness does not happen overnight but is rather an interesting process. There are still things I think I can improve on myself but I make sure that make the steps towards doing so and put the extra time and effort into the craft I love so much.

4. Worrying About What Others Think

This is a very common thing that I think all photographers experience at some point in the course of their career and probably still trying to get over it now. Worrying about the opinions others have will not help you to progress but rather only help to keep you in fear. Regardless of what it is you’re doing, someone will always have an opinion on you that they themselves are entitled to. However, this does not mean that their opinion should matter to you or have you believe that it is a fact. To slowly conquer this fear I often recommend adopting an attitude where you stay focused on yourself and your craft. Filling up your mind with what others think eventually leaves no space for matters concerning you. Prioritize and put the things that are important first and then everything else can come after.

I truly hope this article has helped to open your eyes as to how you can overcome some of the most common fears shared amongst us photographers. Until next time, thank you for stopping by!

Common Mistakes Made In Urban Photography

Since my recent move to Canada, I have been slowly but surely adjusting not only to a different way of life but to a different environment as well. There is a clear and huge contrast between Jamaica and Canada in many ways but the top two are of course the weather and the Urban cities areas of Toronto. Adjusting to the city life took a little time but nonetheless, I eventually grew to appreciate it. This appreciation motivated me to practice or get more involved in street and urban photography. Regardless of me being a professional throughout my career, this genre of photography was still a little new to me and I made a few noticeable mistakes that will share in this article and encourage you to not make the same mistakes as well. This article will cater to beginners or even professionals like myself who are looking to be more involved in the genre of urban photography. Let’s begin!

1. Don’t Overthink It

The first mistake I made when I decide to start urban photography was letting my mind overthink everything I was doing. I was more concerned about the results of my images and if I was even capturing the right subject rather than letting my creativity flow and speak for itself. This left me unsatisfied with the images I captured and I felt as if I was doing urban photography all wrong. To remedy this problem, I made it my duty to do some research. Instagram is a powerful tool that can come in handy when looking for inspiration or just some ideas like Pinterest.

urban photography

Simply search a particular hashtag of interest and you are guaranteed to see at least a few postings of idea or images you like. I used this tool to gain a better understanding of how urban photography should look and what are some creative tricks I could use while out practicing urban photography. After doing my research I gained the understanding that urban photography is not strict in the sense that it has no rules and is open for your creative interpretation. What I mean by that is, urban photography is a representation of what you see and enjoy in an urban environment. Some photographers enjoy capturing yellow cabs in different urban settings and this essentially speaks to what that photographer enjoys. The same logic applies to you as well. Urban photography is a beautiful art that is driven by creative flow and imagination so try not to overthink while shooting too much but rather enjoy what you’re doing.

2. Traveling Heavy

Try to travel as light as possible because during urban photography you will more than likely be doing a lot of walking which can be annoying if you’re carrying a heavy load. You don’t need to walk with too much when it comes to street photography so try to only pack the things you need. In another article I will be talking about some of the gear you will need in urban photography just to give you a clear idea of what to pack in your camera bag.

urban photography

In addition to that, traveling with too much on your back can also hinder your creative process, especially if you’re in a heavily congested area such as a popular city location or high traffic area. You will find that having too much of a load on your back can be a huge hinderance.

3. Don’t Rush

I know doing urban photography for the first time can be very exciting but try not to rush the process too much and forget to capture the things you need. It is easy to get distracted with all that’s happening around us and forget why we’re doing exactly what we do. Photography is a craft that is driven by passion and love for the art itself. Once this passion and love are shown then you are almost guaranteed to be rewarded with the same love right back. Take your time and create the magic you want naturally through the images you take.

urban photography

Great things can be created when you don’t push yourself too much and enjoy the moments leading up to the magic. Take a look around and wait for things to happen with your camera ready and when the right moment comes, you will know.

4. Being Intimidated

Photographing strangers can no doubt be a bit intimidating as you’re never completely sure as to how they will react to you taking a photo of them without them knowing or without permission. You cannot let this hold you back from capturing the shot you need because more than likely you will run into this problem or issue very often during urban photography. You can remedy this situation in two ways such as asking the stranger permission first before capturing the moment which can sometimes not work in your favor. Many times the best pictures are candids and as a result of that sometimes when you ask for permission, it kinda ruins the naturality of the photo itself. I often make this my last resort when doing street photography. The second option is to be completely discrete and hide in plain sight to capture your shot. This leaves your subject completely unaware and can work in your favor more than asking for permission. I’ve always told myself that it’s easier to say sorry than to ask for permission and in this case, its never failed me yet.

Covering A Kids Birthday Party: A Beginner’s Guide

Birthdays are always a special occasion as a kid and even as adults. We grow to appreciate and cherish the day we were born, as well as commemorate how long we’ve been on this beautiful earth. When I would get asked by parents to photograph their kids in general or be the designated photographer for their birthday party, I always had mixed emotions. I always felt honored to be given the responsibility of capturing key moments to be shared in the future with a family relative and the child themselves when that time comes. However, there is also the fact that kids are not the easiest to photograph due to all that energy the generally have and especially at a party where there are sugar-filled things almost everywhere to their disposal. Photographing a kids birthday party can be a bit of work but the smile on the parents faces once they see the moments you’ve captured of their child tends to make it all worth it. In this article, I will be sharing some tips with you that helped me to survive and capture some memorable moments at a kid’s birthday party. These tips will cater to both beginners and professionals as you can never be too prepared when photographing kids. Let’s begin

1. Details

Parents always love to see when the hard work and money they’ve invested in their child’s party doesn’t go unnoticed. As the photographer, it’s apart of your job to capture the small details that were taken into consideration during the preparation of the birthday party itself. Most kid’s parties tend to have a specific them depending on the age or gender of the child. You will often find that boy parties are inspired by a superhero or something similar along those lines that the parents have made unique for him on that day. Likewise when it comes to themes associated with girl birthday parties and so on. Pay attention to these unique details that make the theme special to that child for the parents and other viewers to see.


2. Perspective

I can never stress enough how important it is to change up your angles or perspective frequently when shooting. You never want to be capturing your subject from one position for the whole duration of your session. This will make your images lack diversity and in many ways become uninteresting after a while. In addition to that, It is almost impossible to shoot from one position when covering a kids birthday party. Try as much as possible to change up your angles and try to get on their level when you can to give an interesting view as if you’re looking at the birthday party through their eyes. This will make for more exciting shots while the kids play as well as some humorous ones as well. When doing any form of photography that involve kids that are old enough to walk or one, you can be prepared to be walking or running with them to capture the shot you need to try to keep up.

3. Change Up Your Focal Lengths

When I did my first kids birthday party, I made a mistake that was not too noticeable by the parents but I eventually noticed it while doing post-production work on the images themselves. I stuck to one lens the entire duration of the shoot which was my 50mm f/1.8 which did yield some pretty great shots but there was not much diversity in the focal length of my shots overall. Nonetheless, I learned from this mistake and on second time ever doing a kids birthday party, I resorted to using my 24-70mm f/2.8. This lens offers a lot of diversity in regards to focal length along with its great aperture that can be useful to an extent in low light. The 24-70mm has proven useful in getting some pretty great close up shots of not only the kids but also of details as well. The wide angle option also helps a lot when the times comes to capture shots with the family or shots with the kids and their friends. Having variation in focal length in your images can help not only with perspective as well but to also tell the story of the event a lot better. After all, as photographers, we are the storytellers of whatever we wish to capture.

5. Candids

When covering a kids birthday party, you probably want to shoot continuously and capture each moment you can. Candids are always the best and can sometimes be pure gold as most candids are not easily replaced or replicated. Most of your images are promised to be candids while the kids play and parents catch up, sharing jokes and idea with each other. There will be a lot of laughs, excitement and even emotional moments during the day so be sure you’re always ready and shooting.


Tips On Photographing Abandoned Buildings

One of the things I love about photography so much is that there is no limit to your creativity and the only limit you can set for yourself as a photographer is your imagination. Photography gives users the freedom to capture whatever it is we want and share what it is we captured so that others might see the beauty in it as well. One of my new found things that I’ve enjoyed photographing is abandoned buildings. At first, it sounded a bit creepy and weird to me as well so don’t worry you’re probably not the only one. However, once I gave it a try and explore different creative ways and techniques as to how I can exploit the beauty in these building themselves, I began to enjoy it.

Photographing abandoned buildings is very interesting in many ways. One of the key things that grabbed my interested was the story some of these building told without even having to ask. Some might seem a bit creepy, especially if the building was a hospital or some institution for the ill but others hold some historic value that you can see written all over it. In Jamaica, Caribbean history is something that is taught very vividly in schools and cherished by the natives. Growing up and having to learn about this history, you were encouraged to also visit these historic but abandoned buildings to learn a bit about what happened within it and the purpose it served. In this article, I will be sharing some short but very useful tips as to how you can properly photograph abandoned buildings and tell a story through these images.

1. Carry A Flashlight

One of the first tips I will give to you if you intend on photographing an abandoned building is to consider bringing a flashlight without. These buildings are often obviously without electricity and probably have been for decades to you want to make sure you can see where you’re going and what you’re doing. In addition to that, you also need to be aware of what you’re doing for safety reasons. Some of these buildings may still have some weak spots or dangerous things lying around that can cause harm to you if you’re not careful.

abandoned building

However, apart from the obvious in regards to your safety, the flashlight can also help as a tool during your photography. A flashlight or even the light from your phone can help in the creative process in adding some light to a room while taking long exposure shots which we will also discuss later on in this article. It might take a little practice to do it correctly and make it work for your pictures but I assure you, having a sufficient light source during the process of photographing abandoned buildings can be very helpful in many ways.

2. Need A Tripod

I know in previous articles I’ve written, we’ve spoken about the tripod in the sense that its helpful but not always needed in every genre of photography. However, when it comes to photographing abandoned buildings, not using a tripod is not really an option. In most cases, during the duration of photographing the inside of an abandoned building, you will need to have long exposure times.

abandoned building

In these low light situations, It is important to have your camera capture or absorb as much light as possible for a well-lit image. During this process of long exposure, as some of you may know, you cannot have too many movements happening within your frame or by the camera as it will enable the opportunity for motion blur to occur. This is why you will definitely need a tripod when photographing these abandoned spaces in low light as the other options may not work in your favor.

3. Shoot Wide

Shoot these spaces through a wide-angle lens can often add a sense of context or perspective in regards to the bigger picture. Your viewer can now see all the different characteristics of the building or space itself within one frame and get an understanding of what the building was about or what purpose the building served when it was not abandoned but rather occupied by whoever.

abandoned building

Shooting wide always helps to capture a lot more than what meets the eye and can be very beneficial in telling your story. I usually shoot these wide angle shots with my 24mm f/2.8 but don’t be afraid to go as wide as 10mm if you have the lens to do so.

4. All In The Details

As much as possible, don’t forget to capture the little details in and around the building when you’re shooting. There is often some small elements that can speak to the nature or characteristics of the building itself and will assist in setting the mood or tone of your images. These details will help to give you a definite meaning or idea of the space is about and also put the finishing touches on narrating your story as the photographer or storyteller.

It is always a pleasure to share some of these tips with you that has been a great asset to me as a photographer and I only hope they have great help to you as well. Until next time, thank you for stopping by to give this article a read and I look forward to seeing you again.

Beginner Tips for Getting Great Road Trip Photos

There is always a sense of true therapy in traveling as you look forward to new experiences and anticipate all the new things you might see. Capturing these moments are important as you never know when you will get to do it again and being able to not only tell the story but show it as well through your images can be a true asset in the future. In this article, we will be discussing some of the ways you can capture great images during a road trip. This could be with family, a partner or even a solo trip, regardless of the nature of your trip, these tips will surely come in handy when you need them.

1. Always Look Out

There ‘s no telling what you might see during your journey so you always want to make sure you keep your eyes open for things that might stand out and grab your attention. I know for a fact most road trips can be very long and exhausting but make an effort as much as possible to give the road your attention. There are often many bizarre things in this world and always something new to learn wherever you go.

travel road

2. Capture The Scene

As you drive or ride through different towns or cities, don’t be afraid to explore and visit different scenic locations during the journey to your destination. There is always treasure somewhere waiting to be discovered by someone who can appreciate it in the way it deserves. Don’t be afraid to go a little off course and capture different elements of each location you pass through or take a break at. A collection of these images will help not only to speak to the beauty of the locations you stopped to get to where you’re going but also help to piece together a great story.

3. Be Ready

Always be prepared to capture a shot at any given time. This can be challenging especially if you’re moving pretty fast but nonetheless, it can be done. I recommend doing a few test shots to get your essential settings correct so you don’t end up with a bad image. I usually focus on getting my ISO and aperture at a reasonably good number so that I can quickly and easily make adjustments to just my shutter speed.

travel road

This helps me to move pretty quick when trying to capture a shoot in a moving vehicle. Be mindful that to avoid getting motion blur you will need to consider shooting at a considerably high shutter speed so you have a nice freeze frame and edge to edge sharpness in your image. If you are looking to be a little creative and try panning then you can adjust your settings accordingly but it might be a challenge if you’re trying to do it inside a moving vehicle. Panning is a lot easier when you’re not shaking too much as you can easily be subjected to some motion blur you probably don’t want.

4. Lens

When It comes to capturing shots during a road trip, there’s no specific lens you need to have or use. You can create magic with whatever you have. However, I would recommend probably using a 24-70mm f/2.8 as it gives you variation in the shots you can get with its focal length as well as a very reasonable aperture that might enable you to do some good low light photography during your journey. The 50mm f/1.8 is also good as well, If you read my article then you know this is one of my favorite prime lenses that I always keep on my person.

travel road

It is easy to travel with and is not too heavy on your DSLR or Mirrorless Camera. The 50mm will always give you a nice depth of field in your images with a bokeh that cannot be denied. If you’re looking to have a cost-effective lens that is easy to use and can yield great results then this lens is definitely one to consider.

5. Have Enough Storage

Depending on the duration of the journey you’re looking to embark on, you want to make sure you have enough memory card or space for your trip. If you’re an active shooter like myself then it can be pretty easy to burn through a 16gb or 32gb memory card especially if you’re shooting raw which I strongly recommend. If you’re not one to carry around too many memory cards then you should consider traveling with your laptop and an external hard drive to dump your shots onto for later post-production. I have been a victim to running out of memory many times and it can be a bit difficult while you’re on the move. So before you start your journey, ensure you have enough space to store away your images because you don’t want to end up having to delete potentially great shots to make space for new ones.

I hope these simple tips helped you to get prepared for your first or next road trip and I look forward to seeing you again very soon.

Street Photography: Picking the Right Lens for the Job

Being one of the most diverse forms of photography, street photography can be very exciting. Street Photography encompasses things such as portrait photography, landscape photography, low light photography and more all bundled up into one. This ultimately means there are no specific rules or guidelines when it comes to street photography and can pretty much try anything you please that is fitting to the genre of street photography itself. However, in today’s article, we will be discussing how to choose the right lens before heading out to practice street photography. Using different lenses at different focal lengths can dramatically change your results when doing street photography so you want to make sure you’re choosing or traveling with the right set of lens to take some awesome street photography shots. Let’s begin

1. Wide Angles Lens

I’m personally not the biggest fan of wide-angle lenses when it comes to photography but I must admit they do play their part. Wide angle lenses such as a 24mm or wider are usually considered and mentioned when it comes to things like Landscape photography, Real Estate Photography or even architecture photography. However, as I mentioned earlier, street photography encompasses many different genres of photography and is not too specific.

street photography

With that said, It is always helpful to sometime get a wider perspective of your scene than a close up of everything. Capturing wide angle shots can help tell more of a story as it contains many different elements within the frame that contribute to the image itself. Wide angles also tend to show a lot more interaction with different subject and from time to time can yield some very rewarding and interesting images. A 24mm f/2.8 would come handy if interested in getting wide-angle shots or you could walk around with your 24-70mm f/2.8 as well for variation.

2. Nifty Fifty

Most photographers like myself use a 50mm f/1.8 or 50mm f/1.4 for many reasons. Well, firstly I must say I personally have a lovely relationship with my 50mm as it came in hand when I needed it the most. The 50mm is so easy to mount on your camera and carry around while working perfectly in low light situations. The size of this lens also helps to avoid being seen or drawing too much attention to yourself when shooting. The 24-70mm f/2.8 failed me a few times as it regards to blending in the background and not drawing too much attention.

street photography

With the 50mm you are capable of capturing some amazing candids or portraits when on the move. It is also a pretty good focal length to use in places such as cities or highly populated areas. I would recommend using a 50mm over a 24mm when doing street photography any day but this is also subjective to what it is you’re looking to capture or even the environment you plan to be in.
In addition to focus; length and blending in easily with your surroundings, there is a beautiful depth of field that is created by a 50mm that adds extra layer professionalism to your photo. The 50mm is arguably one of the best lenses out there to have as a beginner and a professional photographer overall. I’m almost certain this will be debated but you must give credit where it’s due and this lens always gets the job done right when you need it to and more.

3. Close Ups

For close detail shots, the 85mm is a lens that could also be considered as well. It can be seen as almost like the bigger brother of the 50mm but it does have its challenges in the field. The first challenge can sometimes be the focal length of the lens itself. If you’re used to using a 50mm and then switch to using an 85mm then you can expect some similarities but noticeable differences when shooting. The first thing I noticed about doing street photography with an 85mm lens is the isolation of my subject. The 85mm creates a crazy out of focus or blurred background which intensifies the focus on your subject itself.

street photography

The result of this is very stunning and will leave your viewer captivated by your image especially if it’s a close-up portrait. However, the focal length of this lens can be a bit challenging when trying to capture subjects moving towards you during street photography as it is an extra 35mm closer than your 50mm. Nonetheless, you eventually get used to it very quickly and start to take some amazing shots.

Picking the right lens is pretty important when it comes to street photography and any other genre of photography for that matter so always consider your options and the results you’re looking for before packing your camera bag. As always, I appreciate you guys stopping by and hope to see you again very soon.

Choosing The Right Camera Bag For Outdoor And Wildlife Photography

Finding the right camera bag as a photographer can seem like a never-ending journey as we tend to find faults here and there with our camera bag a few years after getting them. We often run into the problem of not having enough space or having our camera bag sustain a considerable amount of damage throughout those years of use. Having a great camera bag is important as a photographer as it ensures the safety of your gear as well as to provide comfort on your shoulders when hauling around a lot of equipment. Today we will be spending some time to talk about how you can choose the right camera bag for outdoor and wildlife photography. These two genres tend to require a lot of endurance not only from you as the photographer but also from your gear as well. Outdoor and Wildlife photography are some of the most impulsive and unpredictable genres to be involved in and as a result of this, you want to always be as prepared as possible. There are many things to take into consideration before purchasing a camera bag for your outdoor and wildlife photography journey which I will happily list and explain now.

1. Capacity

The first thing you need to consider when looking into a wildlife photography camera bag is what can it hold or is it capable of managing all the equipment you will be using out in the field. The best way to determine this is to first do a layout of all the things you use or will use than doing outdoor or wildlife photography. Include the things that are completely needed and other gear that you might consider depending on the day.

camera bag

Once you’ve taken a look at all of this thing and taken into consideration how much space you will need, then you can go ahead and check out the capacity of each bag in your options. Most outdoor and wildlife photographers use telephoto lenses which are generally big and heavy in nature so make sure there are compartments available to comfortably facilitate these things. Having a lot of compartments in your camera bag is never a bag thing as you will gradually figure out where you can efficiently put some of your gear.

2. Travel-Friendly

This is another important factor to consider before leaving the store with a camera bag or even checking out online. A travel-friendly camera bag can encompass many things, some of which are the comfort, size, and accessibility. No one really likes to haul around a huge camera bag on their backs that make it look like they’re going camping and not just to take some photos outdoor. Having a camera bag that is both travel-friendly in size and efficiency is important when traveling. In addition too size, you should also take comfort into account. If you plan to be traveling around all day with your camera bag when you want to ensure you don’t stress or injure your back or shoulders as this can be a huge inconvenience when in the field. Having back or shoulder problems as a result of your camera bag is not something you want to have as this can hinder your progress when shooting or even leave you having to resort to medical remedies to ease the pain to shoot again. I have been through this ordeal as a result of being a little cheap and not investing in a proper camera bag and I can assure you that the pain was not worth it. The last thing as it regards to travel-friendly is the accessibility of your camera bag itself. When traveling to your destination, you want to be able to access some of the little things you might need during transit and when you actually get to the destination itself. A bag with great accessibility can be an asset during outdoor and wildlife photography when you need to get an extra memory card, battery or even a microfiber cloth etc. Be sure to always consider these things because I assure you they will come in handy.

3. Durability

When it comes to outdoor and wildlife photography, durability in a camera bag is essential. With durability in your camera bag, there is a high possibility that your bag will be easily subjected to damage from the elements and even damage your equipment in the process. Wildlife photography is not the most sensitive genre of photography and from time to time things can get a little rough when you’re trying to get a shot. This leaves you open to the elements and everything that comes along with. A durable bag will ensure the safety of your equipment and give you peace of mind that you can rely on the camera bag you’re carrying.

camera bag

It’s been a pleasure sharing these short but useful tips with you as it regards outdoor and wildlife photography. I hope this article lend a helping hand in choosing the right camera bag for you and until next time, thank you for stopping by.

What Gear Should You Own for Food Photography?

In a previous article, we spoke a bit about the top 5 mistakes made by a beginner in food photography. We will be continuing on the topic of food photography but in this article, we will be leaning more towards some of the simple but very useful tools or gear needed for food photography. As I’ve mentioned before, food photography is probably one of the most fun genres of photography because after all, who doesn’t like food. The tools needed in food photography are often very simple and easily accessible unless you’re doing studio food photography which is kind of a whole different story. So without having this into being too long, let’s dive into it.

1. Camera

The first thing we need to discuss when it comes to food photography is the camera we’re going to use. If you’re a beginner and looking to be a food photographer or a photographer in general then I would always recommend looking into a full frame camera first. There are many benefits to shooting with a full frame camera that I have already shared in a previous article. However, if you’re on a budget and would like to just have a DSLR camera to shoot with and get some quality content then there is no shame in looking into some of the cheaper crop sensor cameras.


There will obviously be a huge difference between the results you get from a crop sensor than that of a full frame but the camera you choose is subjective to what you’re looking for as well as how much you want to spend. I always recommend using a full frame camera for any project or genre of photography you’re working in because overall using a full frame is always better. Whichever camera you choose, be sure it is capable of shooting in RAW format and has a minimum of at least 12 megapixels. This helps to ensure you get quality images along with the freedom to do whatever you want during post-production.

2. Lens

When it comes to which glass to attach to your camera there are many options that will serve very useful. One of my favorites is the 50mm f/1.8 which help in creating some beautiful bokeh as well as the option to get pretty close to your subject for some detail shots. In addition to that, I’ve always had a special love for a 50mm and I’m sure many other photographers can share the same sentiment. In addition to the 50mm, there are two other focal lengths or lenses I would recommend.

food photography

The second on the list would definitely be the 24-70mm f/2.8 as it comes in very useful if you’re in a well-lit environment and don’t want to be changing lenses too often to achieve a certain look. The 24-70mm is very versatile and will come in handy many ways than one to provide some quality shots. Last but not least on the list of lenses would be the 85mm f/1.8. What I love about the 85mm is that it creates a stunning blurred background that gives your image avert professional look while not losing any detail on whatever it’s focused on. The 85mm can also be used for close shots of different meals with an almost guaranteed result that may just have your mouth running.

3. Tripod

Tripods are always an asset when it comes to food photography. You want to always get your subject as sharp as possible and having a stable base for your camera is very important to achieve that. It helps especially if you have to be shooting at lower shutter speeds than you would hope just to absorb as much light as possible on to your subject. Let’s face it, not all of us have the most steady hands so tripods come in handy when shooting at lower than usual shutter speeds to avoid motion blur and have our subject as sharp as possible.

4. Foam core

Before I started food photography I wasn’t so sure as to what purpose this thing served. However, as I did some more research and gave it a try myself I noticed how much foam core can be a very useful tool in food photography. To be more specific, I would say white foam core helps a lot when shooting by a window and you need to bounce the light on your subject to even it out. Some people resort to using reflectors but I would recommend foam cores more because it reflects light beautifully and is very cheap as well.

food photography

I hope this article has been a great help in getting some of the gear you need for food photography and came in handy in many ways more than one. I always appreciate you guys stopping by to give this article a read and until next time, take care.

Top 5 Common Beginner Food Photography Mistakes

Food photography is a genre of photography that you could say everyone is interested in these days. More and more we see where lifestyle and travel bloggers take great food images with their smartphone or Instagram users overall just sharing what they’re having that day. Smartphone has enabled everyone to be their own kind of photographer but not everyone is aware exactly of what they’re doing. Capturing food is probably one of the most fun things in photography especially if you get to enjoy it after but first, we have to make sure we capture our subject properly before it disappears. In this article, I will be focusing on some of the most common mistakes made by beginners in food photography and encourage you to not make these same mistakes or stop you from making them again. The concept of food photography is pretty simple and only consist of a few key elements that will assist in creating some amazing food shots so let’s begin.

Mistake #1: Using Flash

Natural light will be your best friend when it comes to food photography unless you have a studio set up and looking to capture some magazine photos with pro-level equipment. Using flash in food photography can throw off so many things in your shots and leave you to do a bunch of corrections during post-production. It’s also very disruptive and rude if you’re out and trying to capture some great food shots because it might cause a scene and bother others sitting or dining close to you.


In both cases, if you’re shooting at home or in a restaurant, refrain from using flash as much as possible. When shooting at home, place your dish or subject close to a window where you have a nice even source of natural light to manipulate. There are simple tools that can be used to further help keep your subject well lit which I will share in another article on gear needed for food photography.

Mistake #2: Incorrect Focus

When getting close up shots of your meal in food photography, a shallow depth of field can be so soothing and give your image that well needed professional look to highlight different elements of the meal. However, a common mistake made is when the camera or photographer ends up focusing on the wrong area of the dish. This can be annoying if not noticed during the shoot as it is hard to correct or even impossible in post-production. To remedy this problem, I recommend either setting your AF points correctly to capture the fine detail in the area you need or simply switch to complete manual focus.


If you’ve never used complete manual focus before then it can seem a bit intimidating but I promise after practicing a few times and exercising patience you will grow to appreciate it. Focusing on the right area of a dish during food photography is basically the selling point of the dish itself. People generally love to see what it is exactly you’re eating or they’re about to eat. In addition to seeing details of the meal, there is also a guilty pleasure in temptation when it comes to photographing food.

Mistake #3: Don’t Get Too Close

There are some dishes you don’t want to get too close when capturing them due to the nature of how they’re made. Not every dish is worth getting close and capturing details of as they might not be visually appealing on camera. For example, when I started in Food photography, I learned that there is a reason why most restaurants don’t have pictures up of their BBQ chicken or other selective meals. This is because when taken on camera, it does not look as appetizing and tempting as it might taste. Be very selective and careful in regards to the dishes you decide to capture close-ups of. Not all of them are worth it or will be appealing in photos. When you run into dishes like these, try to change your angle or perspective up a bit in such a way that if you were to see the image you took, as a customer you would want to buy that meal yourself. I usually use that to gage as to if the image is visually appealing or not. Always remember that the key thing in food photography is to visually appeal to your viewer’s stomach.

Mistake #4: Not Trying Different Angles

In general, when it comes to photography, the angles are pretty much very important. When doing food photography you to make sure you’re not capturing too much of the same thing. It is always good to have options but having essentially the same shot over and over is not beneficial.


Try different angles and perspectives as much as possible so that you have a wide variety of shots to choose from rather than just a handful of good shots. This mistake would happen to me very often when I started food photography as I would find a sweet spot and then be reluctant to move from that spot and try different angles.

Mistake #5: Overediting

Food Photography in my opinion, of course, doesn’t need much editing aside probably a few color corrections, sharpening and maybe playing with your basic tools such as contrast etc. Try not to do too much editing when it comes to food photography because that has the capability of enhancing or completely ruining your image. Be mindful of what you’re doing and try not to do an excess of one thing.

It’s been a great pleasure sharing this common mistake and how they can be corrected. I look forward to having you read the next article on some simple tools that will come in handy when doing food photography. Thank you for stopping by, see you again soon.

Common Beginner Mistakes Made In Black And White Photography

The foundation of photography was built on many things that gave us the privilege to enjoy the art today. One of those key elements that helped in building the foundation of photography itself was the art of black and white photography. Black and white images have been around for years and even some of the first few photos that were ever taken in photography were black and white before we learned how to develop and appreciate color as well. Some photographers like myself till this day still appreciate and use black and white photography in their portfolio or even just to practice black and white photography overall. However, throughout the years as a professional photographer, I have noticed where beginners and some professionals like myself make some very common mistakes that are often evident in their images. In this article, I aim to point out some of those mistakes and discuss how we can correct them or even prevent them from happening as you continue to practice or begin diving into black and white photography. Let’s begin!

1. Shooting In JPEG

In black and white photography this is one of the first mistakes you don’t want to make. While I assume most professionals who are reading this article stopped shooting in JPEG years ago, I know there are still some beginners doing this. The limits set when shooting in JPEG can not only damage your image quality but also limit your post-production capabilities as to what you can do with the digital file in Lightroom or even photoshop. When doing black and white photography or any photography for that matter, ensure that your camera’s image format is set to raw at all times. The advantages of shooting raw are unparalleled and are one of the first things you grow to appreciate when you start photography. Back when I was a beginner I was never too clear on the concept of the difference between RAW and JPEG format until I gave it a try and became instantly mindblown.

black and white

The RAW digital format of an image essentially holds a lot more information than that of a JPEG file which speaks to its file size. This information contains so much detail and color that can be manipulated and used to your advantage during post-production. Things such as controlling the intensity of you black and white are an asset when it comes to black and white photography itself. You want to be able to adjust these fine details without suffering losses in quality or compromising your image overall. With that said, don’t make the mistake of shooting in JPEG when practicing or doing black and white photography as the consequences can be damaging to your photo when the time comes to edit.

2. Using Black And White To Save Photos

This is a next mistake commonly used amongst photographers quite often and I must admit it grinds my gears every time. Black and white photography should not be the last resort of safety net for poorly taken or bad images. So often I’ve seen where a poorly lit or colored image was transformed to black and white in the hope that it would make the image more appealing and in most cases, it doesn’t.

black and white

If an image was taken in a poorly lit environment with bad composition and color then changing it to black and white might not do much justice. Black and white photography can fix some images but not all and should not be used as a back up for poor photos. This act might even be deemed disrespectful to photographers who’ve been around since the beginning of the film or black and white photography as they see it as a deeper art than colored photography.

3. Lighting

One of the best things about black and white photography is the ability to shoot in conditions that may have not been suitable for colored photography. Things like an overcast day can look so beautiful when it comes to shooting in black and white but there is a limit to what’s suitable and what’s not suitable lighting for black and white photography. Not all low light situations are acceptable for black and white photography. Be sure to assess your lighting first before considering capturing your image. Black and white photography can be seen as a more calculated way of shooting.

4. Composition

Having great composition in your black and white photos can help make your image speak volumes. Colors usually save images that might have some bad composition but in this case, you don’t have much room for error. Pay as much attention as possible when composing your shot as that will be the key factor in getting your viewers attention.

black and white

I hope some of these short but simple tips will help you to become a better black and white photographer as there so much potential in the art of black and white photography. Always thankful for you stopping by and look forward to seeing you next time.

How To Maximize Creativity With Your Kit Lens

When it comes to lenses, a kit lens is one first lens you’ll have as a beginner in photography. Your kit lens is typically a focal length of 18-55mm and has an aperture that varies depending on the range you’re shooting at. You kits lens is not the most prestigious lens you could have but it’s a start when you’re trying to learn the basics of photography especially when you start to shoot in manual mode. When I just started photography, my kit lens pretty much taught me how to really appreciate the fundamental settings in manual mode such as shutter speed, ISO and not to mention aperture. Kit lenses are generally not the best regards to aperture values but it gets the job done none the less. When I was stuck with a kit lens, I slowly learned how to maximize and use it to its full potential and not just discard it. During this journey of maximizing my kit lens potential, I learned a few tricks that should come in handy for any beginner who’s currently stuck with a kit lens and not sure what to do. In this article, I will be sharing some of those creative tips and tricks that will blow your mind and encourage you to not only have a deeper appreciation for your kit lens but to also motivate you to maximize the use of each lens you may get in the future during your photography career.

1. Panning

The first creative technique I would recommend trying is panning. Panning was probably one of my favorite things to do with a kit lens because the creative result was so captivating and different that some people actually can’t tell that you used a kit lens to take your image. If you’re not sure what panning is, here’s a short explanation. Panning is pretty much capturing a subject in motion with the background having a motion blur but your subject somewhat in focus or having more focus than your background. On the first few tries, this can be a bit difficult but the technique to it is not so complex once you get it a few times. When it comes to panning you will be shooting at a relatively slow shutter speed which will create that motion blur in the background. I usually recommend shooting at a shutter speed about 1/20 or a bit higher depending on your preference to get the motion blur you need. Once you’ve adjusted your setting to what you need then you can work on the technique.


As I said earlier the technique to panning is pretty simple and all you need to do is first focus on the moving subject in front of you and then follow it with your camera while holding down your shutter release button. Try to follow your subject without moving your feet but simply rotating your upper body. This helps to keep your subject in focus as much as possible and your background blurred. Panning is exciting once you’ve got an understanding of it and at times you may even forget that you’’re using a kit lens.

2. Long Exposure

Capturing images with long exposure is another creative technique that could be used with your kit lens. Long exposure shots often make for some amazing images especially when moving water is involved. It is also sometimes hard to determine what lens was used with these shots as well because they are not specific to a genre of photography like portrait photography. When it comes to portraits you often assume or know that the photographer either used a 50mm or 85mm lens to capture their shot.

long exposure

These lenses have different attributes that can be easily detected with a creative eye. However, this is not the same when it comes to long exposure shots as you are capable of using just about anything to capture shots of his nature. Long exposure shots are pretty simple and easy to do as long as you have a tripod or a steady base to rest your camera on. Doing long exposure is pretty straightforward and easy. It is best exemplified with a waterfall, river or just about any moving body of water. You can even get great results with long exposures when capturing cities or moving vehicles.

When it comes to long exposure in photography you want to make sure your shutter speed is considerably slow capture an adequate amount of motion blur or an adequate amount of light. Your shutter speed will vary depending on the lighting situation you’re in. Make sure to have a tripod or stable base when doing long exposure photography for the best results.

3. Wide Shots

Your kit lens has a maximum wide angle of 18mm which is pretty wide and can capture some amazing scenery shots. Landscape photography is always captivating depending on the scenery in front of the camera. My kit lens has enabled me to capture some pretty amazing landscape shots, not mention some great sunset images. Explore the different locations with your kit lens and try shooting wide for a bit to see the amazing things you can capture in one frame.

As usual, its always a pleasure to be sharing these useful tips with you and I look forward to seeing you again pretty soon. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

Beginners Guide To Building A Strong Portfolio

A Photographer’s portfolio can simply be described as his resume. Your portfolio comes in handy when seeking new clients or applying for photography positions. However, building a great portfolio can sometimes be a challenge and is never done overnight. Building a strong portfolio is imperative to every photographer as this can be used in networking or gain the interest of prospective clients which will then help in earning revenue. Just like a job resume, as years go by and you gain more and more experience in the field you will aim to improve your portfolio as well. In this article, I will be appealing to beginners who are looking to build a strong portfolio for future use in their photography career. These tips will come handy when you decide to begin putting together a photography portfolio or if you have an interest in doing so. Let’s begin!

1. Don’t Repeat Images

Often we capture images that are very similar in composition of even the styling of the shot itself. This is not something you want to include in your portfolio. Seeing the same thing over and over can actually get a bit boring and the main reason for building a strong photography portfolio is to grab the attention of your viewer. Some viewers don’t share the same attention span so you want to be careful with the photos you include.


Try to ensure that each shot is different in its own way and tells a different message or story. This adds variety and also gives your viewer something to look forward to in your next image. I’ve seen too many photographers like myself make the same mistake in including the same shots with minor adjustments in their portfolio hoping it would make a difference or strengthen it. Variety with meaning is always good so aim to be different and show how versatile you are.

2. Stick To One Style

If you have a particular style in photography that helped you find the passion for the art itself then you should try sticking to that style and showing it in your portfolio as well. Your portfolio is not only to show that you’re a competent or talented photographer but it is also to show that you are capable of creating a style or image that meshes well with what the client or clients are looking for. This takes us back to the similarities you would see in a regular job resume. If someone has always been in the field of accounting or finance then it would be very odd for them to apply for a job in the field of law when they have no experience in it on their resume. Yes, the individual might be competent enough to carry out a task in law but their experience doesn’t match up. Showcase your unique style and try not to stray too much from it when creating or presenting your photography portfolio. The best thing you can do is to make your work speak for itself.

3. Shoot For Free

The most important step in the process of starting to build a portfolio is to shoot for free. This might not sound like the most appealing step but it is one of the most important steps. People rarely turn down free photoshoots especially if they know the value of them so I can guarantee you that it won’t be hard finding talents to place in front of your camera. however, the trick is to find the right talent that fits well with your style of photography and use that to your advantage.


Even now, as a professional photographer I still sometimes do free shoots or ask a specific talent if they would like to collaborate. The time you spend doing a few free shots will pay off in the future when your work is being viewed.

4. Start Strong & End Strong

You want to be sure to use some of the best images you’ve taken at the starting and ending of your portfolio. This helps in many ways as it leaves a strong memory in the mind of your viewers in addition to making a good impression. Look through some of your favorite shots you’ve taken and save those for the start and end. The images in between can equally be as good but it’s how you start and end that counts the most.

5. Consider Your Audience

Always be sure your images are appealing to the right audience at all times. There is no reason for a bride to be looking through your portfolio and seeing images from corporate events or even images of things outside of wedding shots. Be mindful of who will be looking at your shots and also try to consider that if you were them, what it is exactly what you would like to see from the photographer before considering to hire them. Once you’ve taken these things into account then you should be well on your way to gaining or impressing a new client.


Your photography portfolio will be the cornerstone of showcasing what kind of photographer you are. The time and energy invested in building a strong photography portfolio will definitely pay off in the near future. I would like to thank you for stopping by and it’s always a pleasure sharing these simple but very useful tips with you.

5 Mistakes Made When Building Your Own Photography Website

If you’re a photographer or aspiring photographer looking to take their career or business seriously, you will eventually start looking into having your own website. There are many advantages to having your own website as a photographer or even videographer as it motivates other to take your work or profession a bit more seriously and also makes your work more accessible to potential clients or business owner. However, as photographers, we sometimes don’t have the best idea of where to start in regards to the process of starting your own website. It took me about 6 months of anxiety mixed with procrastination before I started to take building my own website seriously and I have seen the benefits of it so far. In this article, I aim to share some of the top 10 mistakes I’ve made along with other photographers when creating your own photography website. I hope the mistakes pointed out in this article will help you not only to avoid making the same mistakes but to also inspire you to create an even better website to showcase your work. Our images are undeniably apart of us and should be showcased in the most professional and best way possible so that your viewers can appreciate it as much as you do.

1. WordPress

There are many platforms being advertised that you may have seen either on youtube or just casually on other social media platforms. These platforms can be very tempting with amazing templates, great prices, and even irresistible deal but don’t be fooled by this. With these platforms, you are not in complete control of your website but rather only manage the content that goes on it and abides by the rules and restrictions given by the owner of the platform itself.


Their advertisements will sound tempting but you won’t be in complete control of your website itself. WordPress is essentially a well known open-source content management system that is now more popularly used by well-known companies, bloggers and even photographers like yourself. A self-hosted WordPress will give you a 100% control of your website and you will never have to worry about breaking any terms of service then waking up to see your whole website gone.

2. Using A Bad Template

People usually say don’t judge a book by its cover but in this case its hard not to. The template you choose will dictate those first few seconds as to if a viewer stays on your page or closes your tab. Take the time to look through different templates and see what works for you and would be visually appealing to any viewer. Don’t be afraid to even ask some of your fellow photographers or friends what they think just to get a viewers perspective. Choosing templates can be a bit tricky because sometimes everything looks so good but be as meticulous as possible so you choose the right one that blends in with your work perfectly.

3. Don’t Put Up Too Much

When you’ve created your own website you will be excited to showcase your work as much as possible but always try not to showcase too much. Putting too many things on your website can lose the attention of your viewer easily because they might just get bored. There is always beauty in simplicity and keeping things a bit simple in regards to the content you add can work in your favor more than you expected.


In addition to keeping things simple, having too much content on your website can sometimes slow down the functionality of it as well. Too much content combined with a slow website can result in a low in visitors and a lack of interest from clients revisiting your page as well. Keep things as simple and to the point as possible to keep the attention and interest of your viewers.

4. Difficult Navigation

In addition to keeping your content simple and to the point, you can also apply the same logic to the navigation of your website as well. People like myself generally don’t like having to click through too many pages to get to one thing.


You can pretty lose the interest of any viewer after 2 or 3 clicks to get to what they need. Simple navigation will help in things such as selling prints, presets or even wallpapers in addition to showcasing your images. When it comes to grabbing the attention of your viewers always remember to keep it short and simple.

5. Not Using Social Media Buttons

In a day and age where social media platforms are becoming the foundation of faceless networking, It is important to have a social media button available on your website. This encourages your viewers to reach out to you if they have any personal questions or even be able to view more of your work on a different platform such as Instagram for example. Regardless of me having some amazing content on my website, some viewers will crave to see a bit more and If you’re anything like me and invest time into curating a good Instagram feed then I can guarantee you that they will appreciate that as well. I can’t tell you enough stories where large companies reached out to me not just through my email but through my Instagram as well. Social Media Platforms can be used to increase your revenue or views very easily if used properly and not taken at just face value.

I hope this article has helped to not have you make the same mistakes I have as well as other photographers when building your own Photography Website. It is always a pleasure sharing these tips with you and I look forward to seeing you again very soon. Thank you!

Useful Tips On How To Build Your Own Photography Brand

Building your own brand in photography is essentially starting your own company. This will come with many difficult challenges and obstacles but the process itself is a reward and you will begin to appreciate what you’ve created through your craft and your passion for the field of photography itself. Having built my own photography brand from the ground up about 4 years ago taught me a lot of things that I will be sharing with you through this article. Some of these things I learned the hard way as I did not have the guidance or advice I needed to properly navigate myself in the right direction. Hopefully, these tips will help you to avoid the problems I faced and make the transition into building your own photography brand a lot more easy and enjoyable for you.

1. Establish What You Are About

The first step before even getting a graphic designer or doing a logo yourself is to establish what it is your photography brand is about. This basically means to establish what style of photography is your brand most proficient in or the different styles you have to offer. For example, each photographer is different which ultimately makes their style of work different as well. It’s this difference in their style of work and how they shoot that separate them from the batch of other photographers who are doing similar things. To create a successful photography brand, you need to stand out and be something that the regular viewer or businesses have never seen before or don’t see often.


For me, while I lived in Jamaica, the photographers pretty much all had similar styles and predictable patterns which made it hard to stand out if you venture into the same thing. I didn’t really see photographers telling a story of how the lifestyle is in the Caribbean islands in such a marketable way so I decided to do it myself. Separating myself from the same style other photographers use helped to propel me into catching the attention of large brand names as well as some local bloggers who wanted content. Developing and maintaining the relationship with these brands over the years not only helped to ear a great amount of revenue but also get my brand name known to other companies as well.
Make it your duty to be different and establish a style that defines you as a photographer because there are many other photographers out there who are doing the same thing to show what it is about you that would make your brand different than the others.

2. Networking

Your network will help to determine your net worth at the end of the day. Building a great business or brand is all about making the right connections and maintain them as they yield fruitful business relationships. I was never much of a talker to networking was one of the biggest hurdles for me to jump over and until this day I am still working on it and developing my networking skills. Networking will help you to gain clients or even investors into your photography business if you speaking about your brand as a growing business and the potential it has.


Use that one thing that will make you different than other photographers to grab the attention of different people you meet and market yourself and your brand in the best way you can possible. Even if the individual you spent 15 minutes talking with doesn’t become a client, there is a chance he will share your name to a friend or someone else who will develop an interest and could possibly be a new client for you. Networking properly and effectively will have your business skyrocketing a lot faster than you anticipated but bad networking will yield no results and the growth of your brand will remain stagnant.

3. Set Goals

Make it a habit to set certain goals or accomplishments for each month. I have found where this keeps me on track and in the loop with running my business. One of the hardest things about being a photographer and having or building your own business is the possibility of you neglecting one or the other. There were many times where I got so caught up in shooting and editing that I kept forgetting to send invoices off to my clients or check and respond to my emails. This proved to me that I need to up my game and pay more attention to the fine details in running and building my business. To help me resolve this issue, I made a monthly “Achievement Board” which you don’t have to call yours the same thing but that was the first thing that came to mind.


What I would do is list the things I had to do business wise and creative wise for the month and make sure every day I come home, I tick off at least one of those things until their all done. When I just started, there were times when I barely made it through half the board but as time progressed, everything became a lot easier. It can be difficult to be a creative and also play a hand in business at the same time but if you want to own a successful photography brand then you will eventually have to learn how to juggle both at once.

I truly hope these tips have helped you gain an understanding as to what it will take to build your own successful brand, as well as warn you of the thing to come in the process of building your own photography brand as well. It’s always a pleasure having you guys here so until next time, take care.

Common Real Estate Photography Mistakes

Real estate can be an exciting genre of photography when you’re just starting. The thrill of sharing as much information as possible through an image and making a living space look visually appeal can be quite the challenge sometimes. As a beginner when starting real estate photography it is very easy to make some simple mistakes that you won’t notice until after you’ve already completed the shoot. This article will stand to point out some of those common mistakes as well as give you a solution to them so you don’t end up making these mistakes yourself. Of course, I learned some of these mistakes the hard way after completing what I thought was a successful real estate session but I later learned all the things I messed up. I hope this article helps you to avoid such unfortunate events so let’s begin.

1. Not Preparing The Space

One of the first mistakes I made was not educating the client on how to prep the space for photography. Having failed to do this, I ended up spending a fraction of my time trying to prep the space myself to make the images more visually appealing which didn’t work out for the best because it was very rushed and disorganized.

real estate

Giving your client a heads up on how to prep space will save you a lot of time in correcting or fixing any elements in the space you’re capturing. Things such as making the beds, cleaning the floors, cleaning counter tops and making sure everything is spic and span is imperative to getting the best out of your real estate shots. Always keep in mind that communication is important and good communication with your client will save you a lot of trouble in the long run.

2. Not Having A Shot List

In real estate photography, it is sometimes very difficult to keep track of what you’ve already captured as opposed to what you forgot. Depending on the size of the house or building you’re shooting, simple things like forgetting to capture a bathroom or bedroom can become so easy. I recommend creating a shot list before heading to your location or the day before your shoot.

This helps you be even more prepared and also keep track of what you’ve already done. You don’t want to end up doing what I did while photographing a big house. I innocently forgot to capture a few of the guest bathrooms as well as a bedroom due to me not having a list to keep track of what I’m doing. Some photographers might not need a list based on how good your memory is or how organized you are but nonetheless it can’t hurt to create one and have on your person just in case you want to double check and ensure you got absolutely everything you need.

3. Closing Blinds & Curtains

This is one of the most common mistakes seen by beginners and it’s something I’ve done myself as well. There are two sides to this mistake. The first side is when shooting indoors you do not want to close these blinds and curtains that provide you with light. As a photographer light is always your friend and you should not try to block your light sources out when doing real estate photography. I did this as a beginner because the blown out light through the windows was always a pet peeve of mine but as time progressed I learned how to work around it and use it to my advantage.

real estate

The other side of this mistake is when capturing photos on the outside of the house or building. Closed windows or blinds can sometimes make the house not look so appealing or inviting. When taking shots outside, you want to at least have a window or two open to add some personality to your shot and help the place to actually look like a home. This has proven to make viewers a bit more interested in seeing the space due to the visual appeal. As a real estate photographer, you’re like a hype man for the real estate agent as you make their job a little easier to persuade customers.

4. Crooked Images

Taking crooked images in real estate photography as a beginner is more than likely one of the first mistakes you will probably make until you get a hang of it in addition to not having a shot list. Crooked Images can easily be corrected in post by using Lightroom or Photoshop, however, you do not want to depend on these programs each time to correct every photo you’ve taken. Taking the time out to make sure your images are leveled and symmetrical will actually save you a bunch of work and make your post-production workflow a lot easier. I recommend using a tripod that has a level installed to guide you in the right direction and reassure you that your images are properly balanced or aligned.

real estate

Getting settled in real estate photography can be a great learning process as things such as composition and paying keen attention to detail are some of the things that will be an asset throughout your career as a photographer. I truly hope this article helped you to make the mistakes I did and in enable you to become a great real estate photographer. Until next time, thank you for stopping by.

How To Choose The Best Tripod For Your Work

In previous articles, we’ve mentioned and spoken about tripods so much and also referred to them as probably one of the essential tools needed in photography. However, we’ve yet to have an actual discussion about how to choose the right tripod for you as a beginner. Tripods are imperative to many genres of photography and can be a great creative tool. Tripods are probably one of the first few things you purchase as a photographer soon or later at the beginning of your career. Tripods help you to achieve sharper shots while decreasing the chance of camera shake and motion blur. It also lends a helping hand when doing creative techniques in low light photography as well as when you want to get in front of the camera and probably get some photos of yourself taken as well. Tripods serve many purposes but tend not to be glorified in the ways they should. Without dragging this introduction out any longer, let’s begin with some of the key things to choose the right tripod for you.

1. Price Range

The first thing to consider before buying a tripod is to establish how much of a dent you want to put in your bank account or pocket. Photography equipment is not always the cheapest to have a price in mind of how much you want to spend can help you find the tripod you need. This also gives you the chance to question if you need the most expensive tripod or a cheap one can get the job done for you.


Most tripods start from at least $15 and can go up to as much as $1,000. This is not to say the tripod with the biggest price tag is the best because it may not actually be the right on for you so I encourage you to explore your options. You might just spend about $50 on a tripod that will last your years and get the job done just perfectly. The chances of you finding an adequate tripod between the price range of $50-$200 is pretty high.

2. Weight

The next thing to consider before making your tripod purchase is to take into account the weight limitations of your tripod and the weight of your tripod itself. Some tripods can be really heavy and a burden to carry around especially if your a traveling photographer and always on the go. Having added weight on to a camera bag that already probably has two camera bodies, lenses and other equipment inside does not sound fun. Some tripods can actually be unnecessarily heavy and make your life that much difficult to make sure to pay attention to the weight of the tripod before checking. Taking this into consideration will save you a lot of back, neck and shoulder ache in the long run, trust me.


In addition to taking into consideration the weight of your tripod, also consider the weight limitations of the tripod itself. Our DSLR camera can be pretty heavy sometimes depending on the additional weight from the lens or they can feel extremely light also considering the lens that is mounted on to the body. You will need to make sure the tripod of your choice can handle the weight of your camera and more. The reason why this is important is that you don’t want to end up in situations where your camera easily tumbles over and gets damaged due to lack of support from a tripod you paid so much for. A Tripod tumbling over with your equipment can turn into a very expensive problem within a few seconds.

3. Height

In addition to the weight of your tripod and the weight limitations of it as well, you want to take into account the other specs on this piece of equipment such as the height and flexibility as well. If you’re tall like me then a short a tripod will not be helpful to you and will only give you back problems from having to bend so much. On the other hand, if you’re a short or average height person then you probably don’t have to worry about this too much. Take into account how tall the tripod can get as well as how wide its legs can spread and the other capabilities attached. Don’t be fooled too much by the simple face value of tripods as they are capable of many things and useful in many different ways as well.


Once you’ve taken all of these things into account then you should be well on your way to choosing a tripod that is perfect for you and will be an asset throughout your photography career unless you’re clumsy like I am sometime and break it. It’s always a pleasure sharing some tips with you and I do look forward to seeing you again. Until next time, take care!

Pros & Cons Of Hard Drive Storage

In previous articles, we touched a bit on the importance of backing up data on a hard drive as well as some of the pros and cons that come with using cloud storage for your photos, videos, and other important documents. In this article, we will be exploring some of the pros and cons as it regards to using hard drive storage as a photographer or videographer. With everything, there is advantages and disadvantages as nothing is completely perfect and as a result is best we know some of the drawbacks we are getting yourself into so it doesn’t later surprise us in the future. So let us begin with some of the cons and work our way down to the pros.

1. Con: Inevitable Failure

Hard drives tend to have an imaginary clock on them from the moment they start being used. A lot of us go unaware of this because we figure after spending the money we did on a hard drive, it should work for a considerate amount of years if not forever. Well if this what you thought then you’re grossly mistaken. Hard drives are predicted to last about 3 years after which time you will begin to see issues or even have it work when it feels like until it’s completely gone. These 3 years can, however, be significantly shortened if any damages are incurred through things such as bumps, if it falls or if it gets a little wet when you’re stuck in the rain. All of these factors can determine if you will have a working hard drive next week or not. With all these possibilities, it all depends on the type of photographer or videographer you are in terms of the likelihood of these things happening to you or your backup process.

2. Con: Energy Efficiency

A lot of these manufacturers sell you on the idea that you are being equipt with an energy efficient hard drive when in reality this is not so. A regular Hard drive disk actually consumes more power than that of a solid state drive or as some of you may know it as an SSD. Hard drives need more power as they are build up of more moving parts than an SSD and needs the extra juice to get these parts moving so that the disk drive can work efficiently for you. Most manufacturers of laptops these days are leaning more to building their products with SSD and HDD storage for this very reason. The power needed to run a hard drive will reduce the battery life on your laptop without you even knowing it.

3. Con: Size

A lot of people might think size doesn’t matter but in some cases it actually does. The form in which a Hard drive is manufactured is a lot bulkier and naturally heavier as well in comparison to a solid state drive. Considering all the extra moving parts in a hard drive one couldn’t possibly expect anything better. All this extra bulk and weight makes it less suitable for mobility in a laptop as it adds extra weight. The technological advancement of laptops and phones have progressed to a more slender or slim profile which is accommodated very well by SSD storage.

4. Pro: Cheaper

Hard drives are a lot cheaper than SSD for some reason. Manufacturers spend less in the production of hard drives than they do in Solid states drives taking into consideration the pricing paid per gigabyte. This explains the pricing in laptops that are equipt with SSD storage than that of laptops with HDD storage. The price for SSD storage is usually twice or almost twice the amount of hard drive storage. With that said, a hard drive storage and a solid-state drive could have the same capacity with completely different price tags.

5. Pro: Base Capacity

The storage capacity that Hard drives start at is a lot higher than that of capacity SSD’s start at. For example, the base storage capacity for hard drives are probably at least 250GB at a minimum and can probably go up to at least 4TB in storage. While SSD storage will begin at 128GB with a price tag matching how much it would cost from probably a 1TB hard drive which is completely ridiculous. Hard drives will give you more space for your dollar than that of Solid state drives.

6: Pro: Accessibility

Last but not least, the accessibility of hard drives are more than Solid state drives. It is easier to find a Hard drive on the market than it is to find an SSD. If you do find an SSD, as I mentioned earlier the price will be at least double the amount you would pay for a hard drive. This can be both good and bad as the abundance of hard drives might speak to the reliability of hard drives and their frequent failure so there needs to be more for their customers or there are more photographers and videographers like myself using HDD than SSD.

Why DSLRs Will Always Be Better Than Smartphones

It’s safe to say smartphone manufacturers are in an imaginary race to see who can fit the most technology into a product small enough to fit inside your pocket. We’ve seen recently where technology giants such as Apple, Google, and Even Samsung work to make their latest mobile phones as creatively advanced and great as that of a DSLR camera. It is safe to say that the efforts made by these giants are very impressive as the things you can now achieve on just your mobile device small enough to fit in the palm of your hand is a huge jump in the age of technology than anyone expected.

Every year as Apple releases the dates for its annual press event, photographers and videographers like myself stay glued to their screen just waiting to hear what they have done new in regards to their cameras and the capabilities of the new built-in tech. We watch these things in such anticipation knowing that no matter how good the cameras on our smartphones get, we won’t trade it for our DSLR any day. Of course, there are a few advantages when it comes to creating with your smartphone but never mistake this for it is better than your DSLR camera. In this article, I will be sharing some reasons as to why DSLR cameras will always be a lot better than a smartphone.

1. Customizable Settings

One of the first and most important reasons as to why smartphone will always be inferior to DSLR camera is the clear option to customize the setting of your camera how you’d like it at any given time. Smartphones in this day and age to take a lot of amazing images but the settings available to achieve the image taken are limited and most of the heavy lifting is done pretty much by the computer within your phone. There are mobile apps that may enable you to simulate the same effects as if you were shooting on a DSLR such as adjusting your aperture and maybe your shutter speed but that tends to be pretty much it. Everything else such as your aperture, white balance, and other essential settings are determined by your phone.


This is where DSLRs come in handy. DSLR cameras make settings available to you if you don’t want to do all the heavy lifting or have the camera do most of the work for you by providing many different auto modes. It also gives you the option to control everything yourself in full manual modes which make you capable of determining pretty much how you want everything in your image to turn out. This fact cannot be compared to that of the smartphones being produced in this day and age as they are limited in this regard.

2. Lens Selection

Another huge advantage that DSLR cameras have over smartphones is their freedom in lens selection. Every photographer dreams of having a great lens collection and enjoying it accordingly as well. Most smartphones shoot at a general focal length of about 28mm and those that are equipt with dual cameras and capable of achieving a portrait style image are shooting at generally 50mm. Both of these are fairly good lengths for day to day shooting on a smartphone, however, it is still limited. There are certain photos and creatives styles that cannot be achieved with those limitations as well as some laws of physics that cannot be overcome.


A DSLR camera is capable of using over 50 different lenses with each having its own unique purpose to achieve a different style of photography. Things such as focal length and low aperture value are what make these lenses so different from each other. Some if not most of these lenses even cost more than a smartphone itself so making a comparison with smartphones will be completely ridiculous.

3. Low Light Photography

DSLR cameras easily beat smartphones in the race of low light photography as well if you even consider it a race. Trying to achieve low light photography on a smartphone can be very difficult and result in some very low-quality shots if you try. Many of the manufacturing giants of smartphones try to sell the idea that their product can achieve the same results in low light as a DSLR but in reality, the camera pretty much ends up struggling and then the result of your image is probably unappealing. Nonetheless, the freedom to correct some of the issues in your images are available on different apps but the quality is not the same. Smartphones will always have some limitations in regards to photography because the hardware and tools needed to achieve the same effects as a DSLR cannot be implemented into something so thin and so small.


Smartphones have come a long way in technological advancements and making themselves more appealing to creatives but they’re not there yet and probably have a long way to go. Nonetheless, the smartphones of this day and age are amazing and come in handy when capturing things here and there on the go. I look forward to seeing what the next step is for smartphones in the creative industry but until then, nothing beats the DSLR.

Dog Photography For Beginners

Pets are like having furry little babes who can’t speak. They are adorable, can come in different sizes and you can’t help but fall in love with them some way or the other. Today we will be talking about a pet that is considered man’s best friend. Dog’s are personally one of my favorite pets and I love them as much as other dog lovers out there but if we are being completely honest, they are some of the hardest subjects to capture. A dog almost never stays still unless you do the things needed to keep them still or how obedient they actually are. Most dogs enjoy running around and giving their owner all the attention they have to offer so as a photographer you have a bit of a challenge ahead of you. I will be sharing with you some tips that might come in handy as a beginner in dog photography. These tips for photographing dogs worked perfectly for me when I just started to photograph animals or dogs in particular and I am certain they will be a great asset to use as well.

1. Have Treats

There is no quicker way to a dogs heart than to have some food or a tasty treat. If you want to get their attention, these are one of the things you must have before and during your photography session. Most pets won’t look directly into your camera on cue unless they are very trained and even if so, you might not be able to keep their attention for too long.


Dogs prefer toys or something squeaky to play with while with their owners or someone else. With that said, I would advise that you stop at your closest pet store or supermarket before you get to your session and pick up a small package of dog treats or if you’re a pet owner like myself then you can easily borrow one of the toys your own dog uses for the day.

2. Be Patient

Try not to be too much in a rush or aggravated when doing dog photography especially with the owner around. As I said earlier, most pets are like babies but just with a bunch of fur on them and the incapability to talk or communicate like us. Be prepared to spend a little more time and you will eventually get the golden shots you need.

3. Allow them to Play

When photographing dogs especially outside, it’s best that you allow them to play with the toy or toys available to them and try to capture shots while they’re in their moment. Let’s be realistic, the dog will not stop and pose when you need it to so a majority if not all your shots will have to be taken during their play time or with the owner.

4. Get The Owner Involved

Speaking of the owner leads me to my next point. Get the owner involved as much as possible as this helps to get more stable shots and will also show the bond between the owner and their pet. Most owners talk to and treat their pets like kids so try to involve them in various images and I promise the owner themselves will completely love those shots.


5. Fast Shutter Speed

Tackle Dog Photography as if you were tackling sports photography. Dogs are very spontaneous and you can never be sure as to what they are going to do next but it’s your duty to at least be ready for when they decide to do something you’d like to capture. I recommend keeping your shutter speed at least about 1/250 or higher if possible. This gives you the assurance that your subject will be captured in a freeze frame and you will get the sharpest quality possible.

6. Aperture

If possible, try to keep your aperture small to help compensate for any mistakes made with your high shutter speed. Your subject will be constantly moving but to have additional assurance that you’ve to capture your subject you might not want to have a shallow depth of field. This will help to establish a wider focal sharpness and help you not to lose any detail in the event you missed your focus.


7. Focus on Eyes

This is probably a rule in portrait photography and should be a rule in dog or animal photography as well. Try to focus on the eyes of the dog when shooting to add more personality to the images. With crisply focused eyes it can also help to add a little bit more cuteness as well to your image which will have viewers in awe.

Dogs make some of the best pets because of the vivid personality that almost makes you treat them like a human sometimes. They’re undeniably adorable and can be such a source of joy on a bad day. I hope this article helped you in starting off well in Dog photography and made you get some awesome shots. Until next time, thank you for stopping by!

Tools For Making Better Smartphone Videos

The annual evolution of smartphone has opened many doors and made many things a lot more convenient for photographers like me and videographers as well. These technological advancements have enabled us to create quality content on the go that can be used to enhance our social media presence on different platforms or even earn revenue from it as well. Regardless of their limitations in comparison to an actual DSLR camera, smartphones do come in handy. In previous articles, I shared a bit about some of the best mobile apps to have on your smartphones to create amazing videos and pictures. In this article, we will be focusing more on the tools that can be a great help if your a traveling photographer, videographer or blogger on the go and just would like to know some of the tools you need to create some quality videos while on the move. These tools may be subjected to your preference and will vary in cost depending on the brand or size of the tool you choose. Let’s begin

1. Extra Juice

This tool might not seem that important to you but it comes in handy more than you think. Manufacturers constantly try to make a smartphone with longer battery life to match the demands of their consumers but depending on how often you use your smartphone on a day to day and for what reason might shorten how long this battery should last on a full charge. For most creatives, a fully charged battery on any smartphone MAY just last for a few hours until they need to recharge again which brings about the hassle of having to find an outlet to get some more juice. Running your camera and different editing apps on your smartphone for an extended period of time can cut the life of your battery down by at least 20%-30%. This can be annoying because not only does it cut your time for creativity short but it creates an imaginary countdown clock until your phone is about to die.


Things such as power banks come in handy and can be a lifesaver as some of them can pretty much last you about 2-3 days depending on the amount of Milli ampere hour it has. Some power banks have enough to charge a whole laptop while others are made for smaller devices and will keep you juiced up throughout the day. Browse through Amazon and see if you find any that matches your needs and keep in mind that the higher the mAh is the higher the price will be and the more stored power you will have.

2. A Smartphone Gimbal

Modern day smartphones come with built-in stabilization which helps when your capturing video free handed but sometimes the camera shake is so obvious you can’t ignore. These problems can be easily eliminated by investing in a gimbal for your smartphone. I have done a previous article referring to some of the best gimbals on the market which should be some help when looking one to match your needs. Gimbals will step your smartphone videography game through the roof and blow your viewers away with what you’ve done with just your smartphone. There are a few key things to consider when choosing a gimbal which is taking into consideration the weight and size of your smartphone as well as the capabilities of the gimbal you are considering. All gimbals are different in the sense that some offer key features and options that others don’t so look carefully at the specs of each before checking out.

3. Smartphone Tripod


is a universal tool and can come in handy in pretty much any situation involving videography or even photography. Some regular DSLR tripods give you the option of mounting a mobile phone as well but the tripod itself is too heavy or big to just be used for smartphone video. You can consider smaller options on Amazon that surely won’t put much of a dent in your pocket and see if it matches up to your needs and demands to capture the content you want on the go.

4. Microphone

Most built-in smartphone mics are not the best as they sometimes only work efficiently in a quiet room or when you’re actually on the phone. Trying to capture proper audio with a smartphone can be a hassle unless you had additional equipment to use. Smartphone mics actually help in situations where you need quality audio in an environment with a noisy background or just quality audio overall. These little mics will come in handy more often than you anticipated and will cost you less than a bottle of water. Well, no, maybe I exaggerated a little but nonetheless, smartphone mics are ridiculously cheap and can perform very well. Of course, the mic you choose will depend on the specs and compatibility with your phone but generally, that won’t be too much of a problem.


It doesn’t take too much to get the tools needed to make amazing smartphone videos don’t be too timid or anxious to take a look or even test out a few of the tools mentioned. As always, I appreciate you stopping by to give this article a read and I look forward to seeing you again very soon.

5 Reason To Buy A Full-Frame Camera

As a beginner, you may have heard the words full-frame and crop sensor a lot throughout the starting of your career. These terms were quite confusing at first as they were uttered so frequently by professional photographers and videographers during creative conversations. As time went by I started to learn a bit more about what exactly these terms stand for and what are the differences between them. In this article, we will be discussing some of the reason why a beginner it is recommended you by a full-frame camera or consider buying one if you already have a crop sensor DSLR.

1. Better Pixels

Full-frame cameras are built with bigger sensors than those of a crop sensor camera. These bigger sensors enable us to get bigger and better pixels. To put things into perspective you can imagine a pixel to be a little two-dimensional image point and the bigger these image capture points get is the more information that can be collected in regards to things such as color and light. This always explains why when doing low light photography or photography in general and shoot with a high ISO, you will have less noise than the person who is shooting at about the same ISO but on a crop sensor camera.


This has been a great advantage that full-frame cameras have over crop sensors any day and was one of the reasons why I sold my crop sensor very quick and went ahead to get a full-frame camera. An added advantage of this is having a high dynamic range as well as amazing color variations which add to how vibrant and colorful images taken on a full-frame camera look.

2. Higher Resolution

Another obvious reason as to why it’s better to buy a full frame camera as opposed to having a crop sensor is a difference in image resolution. Most if not all full-frame camera can be configured or set to work at a higher megapixel rate if needed. Configuring a full frame to work at a high megapixel rate can provide you with better detail and sharpness in your images. I became a fan of this first day I tried out a full-frame camera and never looked back ever since. The process of enhancing these megapixels will make each individual megapixel smaller but nonetheless, you will still be able to maintain a large sensor advantage as well as keep your image quality and not have to compromise anything in the process.

3. Better At Wide Angles

The name “full-frame” tends to speak for itself in different ways such as the sensor size as well as how much you can capture within your actual frame when composing a shot. Full-frame cameras capture a lot more in a shot than that of crop sensor cameras so much more than you think. To put this into perspective, when you mount a 24mm lens on to a full-frame body, you are guaranteed to get that wide shot you ask for as opposed to when you mount that same lens on to the body of a crop sensor, you will get a lot less than what you got on your full-frame. For this exact reason, you find more and more photographers who started out with a crop sensor camera like myself are switching over rapidly as they becoming aware of these huge differences when shooting with a full-frame body.

4. Better For Printing Images

If you intend to print life-size images in the future or have an exhibition then shooting with anything other than a full-frame camera can make the process a bit difficult. As we mentioned earlier in regards to megapixels, a full-frame camera is capable of collecting a vast amount of information and an element of all of this information is attention to detail.


With all the detail captured in your images when shooting raw, you can effortlessly print your shots. You won’t have to worry about things such as your print looking pixellated or losing all that detail you saw while you were doing post-production. I can admit I have done the complete opposite of this and printed a few shots taken with my old crop sensor camera which didn’t turn out horrible but needless to say, it was not what I expected.

5. Freedom To Crop

The last and one of the best reasons why you should invest in or get a full-frame camera is the freedom to crop the image as much as you please without losing image quality or even detail. Cropping images is one of the greatest creatives tools we have as photographers and is used quite often sometime during post-production. It is avoided by some photographers but others are not scared to cut off the excess they don’t need. However, trying this method on a crop sensor camera can be quite the pain as you see the quality of your images gets worse. With a crop sensor camera, your image is already cropped so trying to do more cropping will result in your image starting to have less quality.

Best External Hard Drives To Back Up Your Photos & Videos

A huge part of photography is not only when you’re capturing images but it what happens after you’ve captured those images. As photographers, we are storytellers but our books are filled with images. Each image is a second or fraction of a second that is captured in time to withstand time itself. With all these stories we have to tell, we need somewhere to store them away for safe keeping and future use. External Hard Drives could be considered a photographers best friend or even his photo library. When I was a beginner I didn’t really understand the importance of having an external hard drive and felt as if everything could be stored on my laptop and boy I was wrong. As I became wiser and transitioned into a professional photographer, I began to appreciate hard drives a lot more and understood why photographers and videographers cherished them so much as I do right now. In this article, we will be talking about some of the top external hard drives I recommend based on price, efficiency, and design.

1. Buffalo MiniStation Extreme NFC

The Buffalo MiniStation is definitely not one of the most popular brands when it comes to external hard drives but from my experience with one, it does its part. It has a USB 3.0 port which in this day and age is slowly becoming outdated but still useful in some cases. If you’re looking for something cost effective to store away your images for a while, this might be appealing to you.

buffalo mini station extreme

This external hard drive is compatible with both Mac and Windows devices. Upon purchase, you will also receive a case that is a bit rugged and helps to protect against dust and water. This will give you a sense of reassurance that your data is protected from any knocks or bumps during transit or day to day usage. Speaking of protected, this hard drive also has a 256-bit AES security feature and NFC (Near Field Communication) as well. What this basically means is that you can easily access your files by tapping an NFC card which is supplied on the drive’s body. You can find this hard drive on Amazon for an exceptionally reasonable price that won’t break the bank.

2. Western Digital My Passport

This is one of the more popular brands that is pretty much known by everyone as soon as you become interested in hard drives. Rightfully so, it stands up to its popularity in reliability and capacity. Not to mention, western digital has some pretty sleek and neat designs for their external hard drives which I do find appealing or aesthetically pleasing. The Western Digital brand has to exceed some of my personal expectations and probably some of yours as well with regards to data transfer. In my experience of using hard drives on the go, I can testify that data transfer is a key element when it comes to purchasing a hard drive. With Western Digital I can assure you that the transfer speeds are great. Of course, this can be subjective to what you’re transferring in regards to file size but nonetheless, Its still good.

western digital my passport

The Western Digital My Passport is equipt with its own backup software and 256-AES encryption. The backup software is a little basic but nothing that would really annoy you or hinder your workflow. It is reasonably priced based on the capacity of your choice, ranging from 1TB and up.

3. Samsung T5 SSD

This is another hard drive that I have noticed to not be so popular in the photography and videography industry for a few reasons. One of these reasons is the price of this hard drive is ridiculous but it does have a few things to offer. The Samsung T5 uses a USB type-C port which has been becoming more popular among different companies or brands. It is very compact is can probably fit in the palm of your hands with ease. Samsung has made this hard drive available in capacities from 250GB up to a maximum of 2TB. If you’re into videography and capture film very often then a 2TB hard drive might not be appealing to you. However, if you’re a photographer who shot’s moderately and not too often then this hard drive might be appealing to you.

samsung t5 ssd

The transfer speed is incredible and will be an asset when you’re on the go or even in a rush to dump some content on it when in a rush. As I said, the price tag on this hard drive might put a dent in your pocket but in my experience, its worth it.

4. Seagate Backup Plus Desktop Drive

Seagate actually won my heart with this one as it is currently my main back up hard drive at home. This hard drive comes in a whopping 5TB capacity and is perfect for your workspace at home when editing photo or videos. It’s transfer speeds is also amazing along with its reliability. It has an old-school USB 3.0 interface but, don’t let the old school interface distract you from its capabilities. Seagate has built a reputation over the years of having a very low failure rate and continues to live up to this standard.


This hard drive is definitely worth the look and in my opinion, it is also worth the money. Having a fast and reliable hard drive at home is an asset and you can never go wrong with having one.

Do’s & Don’ts In Nude Photography: A Field Guide

The subject of nude photography has always been something many photographers stray from as there is a slight awkwardness in it. However, having done a few sessions of nude photography myself, I can attest that it probably one of the most beautiful genres of photography next to doing maternity shoots. It comes with a lot of vulnerability and that is shaped in an artistic manner for the viewers to understand and not to view it for its mild sexual nature. In this article, I will be sharing a few things that you should and should not do when conducting a nude photography session. These tips are primarily for beginners but if you are a professional as well, they will come in handy.

1. Make The Model Feel Comfortable

This is one of the most important things that should be done, before, during and after you’ve completed a session of nude photography. Some models are experienced while others are still in the course of learning and trying to become comfortable with themselves as models. To make this easier for them you should always try to communicate and show respect for what it is they’re doing as being photographed nude might look easy but if you’d be surprised how much courage and effort it takes to follow through with it.

nude photography

In a world where insecurity has become a plague amongst all of us, models sometimes feel as if they lack something. Making the effort to eliminate this discomfort and insecurity will help to make your photography session that much more enjoyable for you and the model.

2. Don’t Ever Touch The Model

This rule is very important and shouldn’t be broken under any circumstance especially if you don’t personally know the model or client. If you need anything to be moved or adjusted, try to communicate this in words as best as possible or have an assistant on set. As the photographer, it is important that you communicate to the model or talent as to what it is you’re looking for without having to touch them.

nude photography

This rule extends to not even touching as much as their elbow or face. Maintain a strict level of professionalism at all times and if you need assistance, seek to have some help who is of the same gender as your talent or model. At all times have respect for boundaries, consent, and professionalism.

3. No Cell Phones

If you intend to have an assistant or more people on set while doing this nude photography session then I would strongly recommend that each individual except the model or talent is permitted to take their phone to the area where the session is taking place. The day and age we live in, mobile phones are capable of taking high-quality images or videos and can instantly be shared with social media platforms or sent to others. This is not to judge the character of the individuals on set but it is always better to be safe than sorry and the permission of one person to take images of a nude models does not give permission to everyone else as well.

4. Communicate Before The Session

Always be transparent with what you’re looking for and the intention of this session. This transparency with adds an extra layer of comfort to the model knowing exactly what they’re getting into. A lack of communication and transparency can cause discomfort and anxiety on both parts such as the photographer as well as the talent or model themselves.

nude photography

Have a discussion a few days or a day before the scheduled date to shoot and bounce an idea off each other as well as letting them know who will be present on the day of the shoot and what is their importance of being on the shoot as well. If possible and you don’t need any help or assistance they I would advise keeping the session as intimate as possible in regards to it just being you and the model or talent. This simplifies a lot of things and leaves you with nothing extra to worry about.

5. Use A Long Focal Length

You want to always keep a safe and professional distance away from your talent or model. Take into consideration that your model is already in a vulnerable state and as the photographer, you being too close might just bring about a sense of discomfort. To play is safe and respectful, try to use a lens with a good enough focal length for you to capture what you need while still keeping a safe distance from your subject as well.

6. Use A Private Location

If you don’t have a space of your own then I would advise looking into finding a private area to do nude photography. This should be a given but you should never try to do nude photography in an area accessible to anyone as it opens an opportunity for mistakes and embarrassments. Make sure the location you’re shooting is private so both you and the talent can have peace of mind knowing there won’t be any unexpected visitors during a session.

nude photography

I hope these tips have been a great help in organizing your next nude session or even preparing for your first ever nude photography session. It’s always a pleasure sharing these tips with you and I appreciate you stopping by.

Pros & Cons To External Hard Drives You Should Know

In everything, there are always drawbacks and advantages. Sometimes these advantages outweigh the drawbacks and sometimes its the other way around. We’ve been talking about hard drives in different aspects for a bit and not yet discuss what are some of the pros and cons to actually having an external hard drive or hard drives. In this article, we will be exploring some of these pros and cons to determine if hard drives are the way to go or is cloud storage about to take over the age of saving images and videos.


1. Cost Effective

Most if not all external hard drives are priced at a reasonable amount for the gigabytes or terabytes you’re getting. If you take into consideration all the time and money that was spent into the production of not only CD’s and DVD’s then you can appreciate what hard drives have done. You can get at least a 4TB external hard drive for just about $140 USD or less depending on the brand today. That hard drives will probably last you a lot longer than any other storage device you’ve used if taken care of.

2. Portability

Of course, we have to take into account how easy it is to walk around with an external hard drive. Some of these hard drives can easily fit in the palm of your hand which makes it that much easier to store away in your backpack or purse if you need to. The portability enables you to walk around with data that is probably 3-4 times the capacity of your average laptop.

3. Easily Replaced

I doubt a photographer or videographer would ever want to face the harsh reality of having to replace an external hard drive but its definitely not the end of the world. It is always important to have a back up for your back just in case anything happens to your hard drive as these things are sometimes fragile. Nonetheless, the loss of data can truly be a headache. If your external hard drive has gone bad it’s not so difficult to get a new one as opposed to something like a laptop or camera. I will still put a little dent in your pocket but on the bright side, you have a brand new hard drive.

4. Transfer Speed

If you’ve ever tried transferring over 2GB of data over the internet or to just a regular USB drive then you know its something that can take hours or minutes depending on the drive itself or the efficiency of the computer. With most external hard drives, speed is something that is promised when it comes to transferring a mass amount of data. At average you are more than likely getting a transfer of 150 megabytes per second when writing data to your external hard drive. This is amazing compared to the other primitive methods of storage that were being used before.

5. Data Protection

Most of the manufacturers of external hard drives have made it a habit of implementing precautionary measures to save the data of their customers. These external hard drives now come with instructions and software that allows you to be able to recover your data given that anything unfortunate happens to the hard drives itself. I personally have never had to use this precaution and I hope I don’t have to anytime soon but this is an added bonus when it comes to using external hard drives.


1. Overheating

Under heavy use or in the summer you may experience your hard drive overheating. Most external hard drives are manufactured in a way that facilitates cooling fans. However, in situations of extreme heat, these cooling fans might not be enough as your hard drive may heat to about 45-50 degrees Celsius while in use.

2. Fragile

Most if not all external hard drives need to be handled with care and could be considered very fragile. This is a major con when it comes to external hard drives because if you do not have a casing to protect it from bumps and shakes then you can unintentionally destroy your hard drive. Of course, manufacturers are still trying to eliminate this issue, however it still a precaution that has to be taken.

3. Theft

External hard drives are not the hardest thing to get your hands on but they hold so much important things on them. From personal experiences, I can say that it is easy for someone of bad character to copy your documents or steal your drive without you even noticing. An external hard drive is very easy to conceal and unless the right precautions are made on the drive, your information, images or videos are readily accessible to anyone.

In conclusion, I think there are more pros than cons to having an external hard drive and if cared and used properly, you will be satisfied. This tool has made a huge impact in the world of photography and videography and will continue to do so unless cloud storage makes a move to take over but who knows? Its been a pleasure sharing these pros and cons with you and until next time, I appreciate you stopping by.

Importance Of Keeping A Backup On Your External Hard Drive

In a previous article, we spoke about some of the few top external hard drives that I would recommend considering as a professional or beginner in photography. In today’s article, we will be talking about why it is important to back up your images and videos not only to an external hard drive but having your content backed up overall.

I’ve always heard its better to be safe than sorry and I’m sure many of us have ended up being sorry and not safe because we were either reluctant, stubborn or just cheap. In my case, as a beginner, I was actually being cheap and decided that my laptop had enough space to manage my raw files and all would be fine. Of course, as a beginner, I was very nieve to storing away my raw files and video on to an external hard drive and ended up losing everything due to my computer completely crashing. This made me a lot wiser as I learned through the pain of losing all my content. Hopefully, after reading this article, you won’t have to experience the same thing I had to as a beginner.

1. Peace Of Mind

Keeping a copy of all the content you’ve taken will gift you with a peace of mind you will thank me for later. Having a peace of mind that your images and content is indeed safe and has the capability of being restored is what you need the most as a photographer. If you’re constantly shooting and adding more and more images to your library, you cannot make the same mistake I did and assume that having it all on your laptop is the best option. Get an external hard drive before you need one.

2. Client Request

Even after sending your clients the final edited images you’ve taken from a session, it is important you keep a copy of them for an extended period of time. I usually recommend having them for about 3-4 months before totally removing them from your library. Clients will often accidentally delete or misplace the photos you’ve taken for them and in this event, it always good to have a spear copy to give them peace of mind as well.

3. Staying Organized

Keeping a backup of your images will help you to stay organized and make your workflow that much better. Once you’ve made it a habit of backing up your projects on a weekly or daily basis, you will eventually create a more structured and organized library of your images.

4. Revisit Old Shots

As you progress or grow as a photographer so does your editing skills and knowledge. You begin to learn new ways and techniques as to how you can edit or recreate an image in software such as Photoshop or even Lightroom. Having your images backed up gives you the freedom to revisit some of these old images and try new techniques on them to see what you can create or even learn from your mistakes. You get a sense of where you’re coming from and it becomes easy to see the progress you’ve made over time. This also helps maintain your humility as well as having some awesome throwbacks for Instagram.

5. Mass Portable Storage

With your work backed up on an external hard drive, it becomes a lot easier to share images or videos while on the go. I can recall a time when I had to get some images off to a client but time was an issue as my internet was not moving fast enough for the client to get the images in time for their intended use. The folder was also too big to put on a regular USB drive so my external hard drive came in handy with having to physically drop the images off to the client. It wasn’t the most convenient method but nonetheless, it helped.

6. Extended Storage and Protection

External hard drives can be purchased in any capacity that matches how frequent you shoot or the number of images or videos you have. Most of these external hard drives have more space than your laptop or desktop and as a result, it allows you to have storage to your disposal at all times. In addition to that, your images are always protecting by software embedded into some of these external hard drives. This software helps to protect your images from becoming corrupted or if your hard drive fails, you can also recover the files that were on it as well.

There are many advantages and important reasons as to why having a backup of your work is critical as a photographer or videographer. The feeling you get when you’ve lost all the work you’ve is not a good one and I would not want anyone else to experience that as well. I hope this article will stand as a warning and lesson as to why you should back up your content.

Pros & Cons Of Cloud Storage

Storage obviously plays a major part in the career of photographers, videographers and even normal people who are not into the creative field. Just like the cameras and the equipment around us has been evolving, so has the way we use storage and what we use to store our personal and important files on. Today we will be talking just a bit about using cloud storage but before we start, lets first understand what exactly the cloud is. The cloud in the simplest term is a terrestrial home where data is stored. Your data is not in one location but rather in many different locations and can be available to you with a few clicks here and thereafter entering passwords and usernames of course. The cloud is pretty much a network of servers that store information to you until it is requested or needed. You will see this concept being Introduced to you through varies mediums and big companies such as Google and apple just to name a few. However, this cloud storage has its advantages and of course, its drawbacks as well which I will now list whole explaining each.

1. Pro: Offsite Management

One of the biggest pros of cloud storage so far is that you can easily manage your information from anywhere you are on any device you’d like to. You simply just have to sign into whatever server it is you use from Google, Apple or another provider and you can easily manage your data. This has worked for me many times while I was out and needed to share some images with a client but I was not around my computer. It was very simple to sign in and share folders or files needed at that time with just a few taps. This accessibility has proven to come in handy many times and saved me from a lot of trouble might I add.

2. Pro: Unlimited Storage

There is always more space in the cloud if you need it. Different providers or servers will carry different cost but nonetheless, you can always get as much space as you need. This saves you from worrying if you have too much data and where to put it all because with the cloud the possibilities are pretty much limitless in that regard.

3. Pro: Cost For Storage

Cloud storage really hit the manufacturers of external hard drives with the price of their storage options. The price for storage on platforms that offer this service is significantly cheaper per month than buying an external hard drive with the possibility of it failing due to how fragile it is. You can currently get an ample amount of cloud storage without even remotely putting a dent in your pocket or wallet.

4. Pro: Development

The geniuses behind the cloud are always aiming to make it safer and secure for users. The concept of the cloud is always evolving as changes are being made for the benefit of the businesses and individuals who use it the most. This constant evolving helps to introduce new and safer methods as to how you can protect your information as well as easier ways to recover your information if unfortunately lost.

5. Con: Safety

While developers are still working on making the cloud a safer place, there have been to many instances where people have been hacked. This puts fear in the mind of users who have personal information to think that their data is on the internet and somewhere out there in the world is someone crazy enough to try and get it to either expose or use it to their advantage. The safety among users of the cloud is something that is worked on constantly but there are users like myself who sometimes still live in fear. I would recommend not to store anything too personal or damaging in the cloud as that could be an unforeseen demise somewhere down the line. As I’ve said before, its always better to be safe than to be sorry.

6. Con: Speed

How fast you download or even upload anything from your cloud is dependent on how fast or how good your wifi is. This can be a huge problem if you’re in a place with not the best access to the internet but need to download an image or document to show to someone. To properly enjoy the cloud, you will need a good internet and if you’re anything like me then your best option might be at home or at work. However, if the internet providers ever end up failing then some of us can be doomed in just a matter of seconds. The reliability upon bandwidth to effectively use the cloud is something that eventually will have to be worked on if possible because it has been a hindrance to many photographers and videographers like myself.

7. Con: Lifetime Cost

The price you pay per month for the convenience of cloud storage sounds great at first until you consider the years ahead of how much you will be paying as a whole. It’s similar to when you visit a car dealership. The overall cost of the vehicle will naturally have you in shock until the sales representative give’s you a monthly figure to achieve that overall cost which sounds a lot more appealing. This lifetime cost can be very high if you consider how much you’re paying on a yearly bases for mass storage.

I hope this article has helped you to see both the advantages and disadvantages of using cloud storage as everything has its pros and cons. I truly appreciate you stopping by to read this article and look forward to seeing you another time. Until then, take care.

Beginner Tips For Extreme Sports Photography

Capturing photographs of extreme sports is an extreme sport itself. Each extreme sport has its own set of rules and unique technicalities that allowed it to be considered extreme. These stunts and technicalities are what also influence individuals to give them a try and maybe even turn professionals at what they do. In the Island of Jamaica where I’m from, there weren’t many extreme sports to be seen other than your occasional dirt bikes or even a few jeeps driving through some mud. As I moved to North America, I became introduced to this kind of sport and even more so decided to learn how to photograph the sport itself extremely well, no pun intended. In this article, I will be sharing some of the tips I had to learn very quickly as a beginner to successfully capture great moments in the world of Extreme Sports.

1. Learn The Sport

The first step I took towards becoming a good photographer at extreme sports was to do my research as to what is considered extreme sports as well as get an understand as to what the rules and technicalities of these extreme sports are. Having a handle on these things will better help you understand how the sport works and maybe even develop an appreciation for it. Not knowing what you’re getting yourself into can be extremely dangerous as you don’t know what exactly to expect. Not only will this knowledge help you to understand and appreciate the sport more but it will also prepare you physically and mentally for what’s to come.

extreme sports

By mental preparedness, I mean being aware of the dangers that come with the sport, especially if you’re going to be very close by the action as well as being aware of your surroundings because in a split second anything can happen. By physical preparedness, it speaks to dressing appropriately for the event you’re attending. You don’t want to be the only photographer in jeans and button-up shirt when everyone else is in a t-shirt and some sneakers at a dirt bike event. Also be physically aware as well in the event that anything unfortunate is to happen.

2. Settings

Sports Photography itself is fast and spontaneous in nature so you can definitely apply the same concept to sports photography. The only thing is, things might be a bit more spontaneous and not as predictable as sports photography especially as a beginner. If you’re a fan of always shooting in manual mode then I can only give you props for doing the same thing when it comes to photographing extreme sports. Reason being is that most if not all subjects in extreme sports are either moving fast or are unpredictable in their movement. This means your subject will be in a constant state of different lighting situations which might be a bit difficult to adjust and get used to in manual mode.

extreme sports

The time it might take you to readjust settings, the possibilities of you missing a key shot is very high.
I recommend switching your camera mode to shutter priority. This helps as it is always easier to adjust your shutter speed while you’re shooting than it is to adjust your aperture and ISO. Try starting off with a shutter speed with at least 1/500. If this is too fast then you can gradually work your way down to a minimum of at least 1/250 as anything lower than that is more than likely going to give you motion blur. A high shutter speed will ensure your subject is captured in a freeze frame with that crisp sharpness you will need.

3. Angles

Try not to stay in one position for too long. Depending on the sport I know you might feel safe in one spot but I do recommend you move around and try to capture the subject or subjects from different angles. Different angles or perspectives can bring life to a shot very easily if you give it a try. The trick is to shoot in different spots until you find yourself in a position where you are getting some amazing frames. Even when you’ve found this sweet spot, try not to stay there for too long because as photographers I know we can get comfortable in a sweet spot and neglect the other possibilities around.

extreme sports

4. Be Careful

Last but not least I recommend you be very careful and stay aware of your surrounds as I mentioned earlier. Some of these extreme sporting events can go from amazing to bad very quickly and you don’t want to be a victim of that.

extreme sports

Depending on the sport, if protective gear is available then I do advise you wear it as it is always better to be safe than sorry. Your safety comes first and then you can get your shots after but never compromise your safety too much for a single shot.

Useful Tips On How To Manage Your Workflow Efficiently

Some say that the most interesting part of photography is not what you do with the camera when you’re in the field but what you do when you’re behind the computer or laptop working on the images you’ve taken. When it comes to photography, post-production can either be the most stressful or most enjoyable part of your process depending on the type of photographer you are. When I just started photography I went through various stages where I was not always enthused to do editing, especially if I was not a fan of the genre itself because I never really found it interesting. However, as time went by and I became more experienced in my career path, I grew to understand and appreciate the process of having a good workflow to not only meet the demands of your clients but to also build good relationships with corporate businesses. In this article, we will be discussing how you can manage your workflow during a busy season and overall as a photographer. These simple tips will come in handy to some of those who have a long clientele list or photographers who are trying to keep up with their image turnover times as this can also be hectic as well. Let’s begin

Tip #1: Create A System

The first step to actively managing your workflow is to create a system that works for you. Every photographer is different not only in their style of photography but their lifestyle as well. Some of us only do photography as a part-time job while others may be doing it as something full time for their career choice. With these differences in lifestyle, you can create a system in many ways. It is sometimes hard to stay disciplined as a full-time photographer, especially if you’re a freelancer because it can be so easy to get lazy or even get distracted from the work you have left to do.


The first step in creating a system for yourself is acknowledging what it is you want to start with. Some photographers like myself review their images first and start the selection process while other may make it a habit to back up their shots on to an external hard drive or the cloud before starting their selection process. Again this is all done depending on the kind of photographer you are and how you schedule your time. With a system in place, it gives you a sense of starting to become organized which then encourages you to follow this system and make it your routine every time you shoot. Once this system becomes a habit, you will see a huge improvement in not only your work ethic but your image turn over time as well. Great image turn over times will always please clients and also motivate these clients to tell others about you.

Tip #2: Prioritize

Prioritizing your objectives will become a great asset in managing or improving your photography workflow. It always helps to create a list of the things you need to go along with their respective deadlines or other details. We’ve spoken about perspective a lot in photography itself but in this case, having the right perspective on the things you need to get done is also important. Determining top-level priorities over those that could be considered low level will help to get everything you need to get done in a timely manner.


Naturally, as photographers, we will end with clients who need images or edits a lot more urgent than others. Some of these clients may request images urgently within reason while others can wait but are too anxious to do so. Always prioritize those who have a valid reason as to why they need a quicker turnover than others and put them at the top of your list. The faster you get these clients what they need and complete the task ahead, is the faster you can stick to the list you have created and move on to the next one.

Tip #3: Master Your Time

Time waits on nobody and as a result, you need to make every hour count and not just count the hours as they go along. Mastering how to effectively use the time to your advantage will be more of an asset than the other tips I’ve already listed. We sometimes get so easily caught up in other things that we forget what’s important or whats a priority. Also with the common distraction of social media in our day to day lives it has become so easy to waste the time you need. If I was to confess anything during this article, It would be that even me, myself get caught up in checking my phone while I’m writing this article so don’t feel guilty as it happens to all of us. The art of mastering time is not watching itself but rather have time work with you.

It’s been a pleasure sharing these simple but useful tips and I hope they become an asset to you as they have to me. Until next time, take care.

Sunset Photography For Beginners: 6 Tips to Improve Your Work

As we transition into the winter season from fall, the days become shorter and the nights so much longer but there is a bright side to all of this. The shorter the days become is the earlier we will see the sunset. As a child, watching the sunset was one of the most majestic things I could see especially if I was on a beach. This made me develop not only a love for sunsets but an appreciation for them as well with the vivid colors that come with them. I can only imagine some of you share the same feeling and would love to capture the moment in the best way possible. Well, no worries because I am here to teach you some of the basic things you need to do to get some amazing sunset shots that will last forever.

1. Clean Your Lens

The first step to making sure you get a clean and crisp sunset shot is to clean your lens. If you’re anything like me then you probably make sure your lenses are clean when you find the time or on a weekly bases. This should be a common habit of you and not only when you want to take sunset photos but nonetheless, it is imperative for sunset images. In your day to day shooting, when you take your lens in and out your camera bag or switch another lens on to your camera body, in those few seconds it can accumulate dust, sand or even water spots. Some of you may be wondering why is this simple thing so important. Well, when doing sunset photography you will be pointing your lens to the sun which will reveal even some of the tiniest specs on your lens indicating how dirty it is. Of course, some of these spots can be cloned out during post-production but to save yourself from doing all that work, just clean it and you’ll be amazed at the results you get.


2. Shoot Wide

My second tip to you would be to shoot with a wide angle lens. Sunset photography can be categorized as landscape photography as well which you generally shoot at about 14mm or 24mm. I make it a habit to use my 24mm f/2.8 which helps to compose my shoot good enough and capture all the detail I need in my photo. After you’ve gotten enough wide angle shots then you can consider recomposing and zooming or switching lenses to capture a different perspective but act fast as you only have few minutes to be intimate with the sun.


3. Use a Tripod

I think I’ve mentioned using a tripod in so many of my articles, it’s almost a compulsory Item but I promise it does actually come in hand when capturing the sun. Some of you may disagree and say that tripods are just extra weight that slows you down and to an extent that is true but it comes in handy in more occasions than one. As the sun sets, each second or minute that passes by, it gets darker. As it gets darker you have to adjust your shutter speed to match the current lighting around you for a good shot. A slow shutter speed will make you vulnerable to things such as camera shake which will ruin your shot. The tripod will help in your general composition and leave you not having to worry about image sharpness and stabilization


4. Aperture Priority Mode

As a beginner, you might not be completely comfortable shooting in full manual mode for sunset photography as it can be a challenge. Don’t be afraid to change that dial to aperture priority mode and capture your shows as it doesn’t make you any less of a photographer. Your shutter priority mode can easily be acknowledged as an “A” or “Av” on your dial. The mode basically gives you control over the aperture value and the camera will adjust everything else such as your shutter speed to match the aperture you’ve chosen. However, if you are completely comfortable with shooting in full manual then be my guest but it might take you a little time to get all the setting right as the light is constantly changing and you might miss what could’ve been your best shot.


5. Use LCD Screen

When capturing sunsets, try to use your LCD screen as much as possible. Not only does it gives you a better perspective of the scene you’re capturing at a wide angle but it also helps not to damage your eyes as well. Capturing images of the sun can be harmful to your eyes if you try to use the optical viewfinder instead of the screen.

6. Patience Is Key

The sun is a very majestic and great model. You have to give the sunset some time and don’t be so quick to pack up and leave once you’ve gotten the shot you wanted. As the sun falls below the horizon, you have no idea what surprises may be in store. Wait around a bit until its completely gone so you can capture and enjoy every minute of it.

Useful Rain Photography Tips You Need to Know

The beauty about photography is how diverse it is and how you can use it to find the beauty in almost anything you do on a day to day basis. As photographers, we often capture things that the normal individual walks by daily without even noticing it. Photography is not limited to the time of day or the location in which you are in, so the only limit in photography is your imagination .. and if your memory card is full. Today we’re going to talk about creating amazing images in the rain. Rain photography is not the most popular thing among photographers these days for obvious reasons of course but you can’t knock it unless you give it a try. This article will speak to how you prepare for rain photography as well as some of the things to look out for when practicing rain photography on your own. Let’s dive in!

1. Protect Your Gear

Unless you want to be crying over your DSLR or mirrorless camera, I would suggest you make the right preparations to protect your gear from the elements. Water and electronics clearly don’t mix well so try to be safe rather than sorry. You can consider wearing a raincoat that will cover both you and your backpack or consider exploring the different camera bag options online.


More and more manufacturers these days are making their products to protect your valuables from things such as snow or even rain. These items are very affordable and will save you from so much heartache in the future. If you’re not looking to currently invest into a weatherproof right now then you could consider a much cheaper option of walking with a gallon sized plastic bag to help you protect your gear. It doesn’t sound like the safest or the best option but I can assure you if used correctly it will get the job done.

2. Reflections

Water itself is a very reflective thing which can work to your advantage. During the rain, water will eventually start to collect and form a puddle somewhere that can be used as a creative tool. Look out for these puddles and exploit them as they have the potential of creating some really smashing shot especially if in a city filled with lights. You can also look out for reflections on wet concrete as well.


Some of you may not have noticed but wet concrete sometimes becomes a great creative tool as it also helps to reflect things surrounding it. In rain photography, reflections will become your best friend as it adds that extra bang to your photos with so much ease.

3. Lens Hood

This little piece of plastic comes in hand in many ways more than one. During rain photography, your lens hood will protect your lens from getting any water droplets on the front and it also helps to protect your lens from being damaged if you bump into anything as well. With that said, be sure to walk with a lens hood when doing rain photography.


4. Microfiber Cloth

In the event that anything on your camera ends up getting wet, It’s always helpful to keep a microfiber cloth on your person. This cloth will help to clean the front of your lens and any other equipment well.

5. Shutter Speed

As you know the shutter speed can play a huge part in the sharpness of your subject in an image and during rain photography, this can subjective to your style of shooting or what you’re looking for. You have the creative option of shooting at a high shutter speed to see every single raindrop frozen in your image or you can select a slower shutter speed for a more creative shot. I usually recommend starting off at about 1/250 and from that point, you can decide if you want to go a bit higher or a bit lower to about 1/125. Doing anything be 1/125 may result in some very blurry images.


6. Focal Length

This is the last but one of the most important tips. When doing rain photography you want to make sure you have the right focal length for the shots you’re looking for. I usually recommend either shooting at a wide angle with a 24mm f/2.8 or you can look into shooting with a 50mm f/1.8. I use the 50mm more often because it’s always perfect for low light photography and helps me to capture some amazing shots while not having to compromise my shutter speed or iso too much. That would probably be a challenge with the 24mm but it all depends on the time of the day you intend to shoot and what you’re looking for as the photographer.

It’s always fun sharing these simple tips and tricks with you and I hope they’ve been a great help. Until next time, I look forward to seeing you again.

5 Reasons Why You Should Start Your Own Photography Blog

Social media platforms have been the cornerstone of growth for business and individuals for the past few years. These platforms have helped business and photographer like myself to build their own audience and be able to reach out to others that they never saw possible. I’ve personally met some of my greatest inspirations in photography not only through my work but rather keeping up to date with them through their social media platforms and or their blog postings as well. These blog postings help to keep their viewers or fans more informed as to special events or workshops they have coming up or sales on things such as presets or even prints. Photography blogs in this day and age have proven to be very helpful in many ways more than one. In this article, I will be listing some of the best advantages that come from creating your own photography blog. If you are indeed passionate about your career or love for photography then some of these tips will encourage you to get started on creating your own.

1. Inspire Growth

Having your own will help you grow in many ways more than you thought. You will be updating your blog on weekly basis or more frequent depending on the type of photographer and blogger you are. As you begin the habit of uploading and reviewing your work, you will start to notice different things about yourself and the work you create. Sometimes as photographers or individuals we tend to not see things from a different perspective until it is shown to us.


It is easy to get comfortable shooting in a particular way or sticking to a certain style that does not really inspire growth or adds much diversity to our work as photographers. When your photography blog you will begin to acknowledge these bad habits or trends in your work and then be inspired to make a change or try something new. Switching it up is always a good thing so don’t be scared or discouraged when you see that you need to make a change. Sometimes the best things for us are never the easiest things to do.

2. Establish Your Own Platform

With your own photography blog, you have the freedom to do pretty much anything you wish with it. One of the advantages of this is the ability to establish your own platform where you can share opinions, views, your work or even a quick video of a session you did. You are not limited to what you can do or say like other platforms.


When you have a platform for yourself, you can start to try different ways of getting your people to view it and tune in. For example, the photographers that I look to usually use Instagram to promote their own platforms. Instagram is one of the most popular platforms used today by millions of users and this can work to your advantage. Simply upload stories and make posts promoting your blog will help to send traffic to it and slowly but surely build an audience.

3. No Limits

As I mentioned earlier, a photography blog gives you the freedom to pretty much do whatever you want as the owner of it. One of the best reasons to have your own photography blog is to upload as much of your work as you please. You have no limits to how many photos you can upload as well as no limits to the type of images you can upload as well. This freedom is great when you want to keep your blog as fresh as possible and replenish it with new content whenever you’ve done a recent session or find some old images you’ve revisited and would like to share.

4. Create Relationships

Having your own photography blog is another way to build relationships with your viewers and giving them a better understanding as to who you are and what inspired you to do photography. Creating and maintaining these relationships will eventually help you to develop a loyal audience who will always be looking towards seeing new content from you or see a new update on your blog.


People will generally pay more attention to what you say or share on your own blog than on Facebook or even Instagram. The reason for this is that these other platforms have so much to see and can keep viewers distracted with so many other things very easily. Things such as likes, comments or even friend request can easily grab a viewers attention these days. I am a victim of doing this as well because it is so easy to get distracted. With your own platform, you can demand the attention of your viewer and control the things they get distracted by while on your blog.

5. Inspire Others

Controlling your own photography blog will not only inspire you but help to inspire other creatives as well. So easily we get inspired by others and forget that we can inspire as well. Putting in all the hard work into building and promoting your own photography brand will motivate others to do the same as they see the passion and commitment you have for your craft.

It always a pleasure sharing some of these simple but short points with you. I hope these points have inspired you to go ahead and start your own photography blog and build your own platform as well. Thank you so much for stopping by and see you again soon.

Why It’s Okay To Take a Break From Photography

They always say too much of one thing is never good for anybody. In many aspects, this statement could be considered true. They’ve said that even drinking too much water or sleeping too much has its negative effect on an individual whether it be a long-term or short-term effect. The same logic can then be applied to the field of photography whereas sometimes you just need to put your camera down and take a breather. Speaking from experience, as a photographer we sometimes get caught up in a cycle that is not good for our well being in many ways. We go from doing sessions to image selection and post-production to sleep and then the cycle continues. Most of us end up having so many sessions in one day that we don’t find the time to eat or enjoy the income we are making from all these sessions. In this article, I will be sharing with you just a few reasons as to why it is completely okay for you to put your camera down for a bit and take a complete break from photography. Let us begin.

1. Recharge

Constantly creating will eventually drain you and leave you with what I like to call a creative block. You begin to lack ideas and inspiration to even shoot and then you start to question if photography is what you should even be doing. Taking a break from time to time will avoid this from happening and give your mind ample time to recharge and come up with new ideas.


This doesn’t mean you should lay in bed with your camera by the table and look at the ceiling hoping for Ideas to come. Take the time and plan a trip with some friends or even go on an adventure without the camera and actually have some fun. You’d be amazed to see the ideas that come to mind when you’re not actually thinking about work. These ideas tend to be some of the best ones that eventually turn out into something amazing.

2. Not Take Things For Granted

Taking a break from photographer teaches you to not take things and people in your life for granted in many ways. The cycle created when you’re photography sometimes make you into an introvert without you even knowing that you’re becoming one. You spend hours around your computer editing and choosing images that you lose track of time and if you’re anything like me, you can even forget to eat. Let the laptop gather a little dust and go outside to venture into the things you didn’t see before.


Call or text that old friend that’s in town and go hang out with them from a while. The simple things in life are your greatest blessings and naturally, as human beings, we tend to take those little things for granted until we no longer have them. Don’t end up living in regret because you became a zombie by your job or passion. There are still many other things in the world to actually enjoy without your camera in your hand.

3. Refocus

Try to treat yourself like the camera you love so much. Pretend as if your life is a camera itself and your about to focus on your subject but you notice that this subject is not actually what you want to capture. You have to release that finger you had half-pressed on the shutter to focus and point the camera in another direction and refocus on what it is you actually want. Take the time to reevaluate yourself as a photographer and see where your career is heading and think if it is going where you want it to go. If not, you should begin to consider how you can either fix that or make some adjustments. Having time to refocus will change your perspective on certain aspects of your career as a photographer and it might just make you an even better one.


4. Time To Reflect

The Journey to becoming the great photographer you are was not achieved overnight. You’ve worked hard and dedicated so much time to the field that now you need some time to reflect. You can now look back and appreciate where you’re coming from and see the progress you’ve made with where you’re going. Reflection often brings about humility in many ways. This might sound crazy but ask yourself some questions to see answers you have for yourself. It at that moment you will learn what kinda of individual or photographer you are.

I won’t lie to you and say that taking a break from photography is the easiest thing to do because it’s not. It took a few days of having to convince myself to leave the camera at home for my own good before I even started to see the benefits of it. Taking a step back from the things you love can sometimes teach you how to love them even more or teach you how much you loved them in the first place. Take this break and rekindle the spark and love you had for photography from when you got your first DSLR.

Photography In Winter: Essential Tips for Incredible Adventures

Its that time of the year when we breathe and see our breath right in front of us, lose sensation in our fingers and feel our ears getting numb. If you’re guessing then you’ve guessed right, it’s winter. I can only imagine only a handful of people are actually happy about winter while the rest of us are reluctantly leaving our homes or apartments to deal with snow and temperatures that match just about the same in our freezers. It makes you question as to why anyone would enjoy this. Nonetheless, we still have magic to create amazing images for people to see, so as photographers we won’t let some snow and frigid temperatures hold us back. We would much rather use it to our advantage and create some amazing shots and in this article, I will be sharing with you some tips that will help you be prepared for this winter season.

1. Keep Batteries Warm

As is ridiculous as it may sound, the temperatures outside will have a lot to do with how long your batteries last and this is subjective to pretty much about anything on your person that is battery operated. If you have an iPhone or Andriod device in temperatures in the negatives then you can expect to see a drastic change in battery life and phone usage. The same principle applies to the batteries in your camera.


On a regular day, a full change would enable you to get a few hundred shots and some but in winter that will drop to about 50-65% less than what you expected. So instead of being able to get 400 shots until your memory card is full and your batteries die, you may just be able to get 150 or 200 the most. Keep your batteries close and provide them with enough body heat so you can get the full use of them while you’re out.

2. Prevent Your Camera From Fogging Up

I’ve experienced this quite a few times and was honestly confused when it first happened because I couldn’t shoot until it cleared up and no matter what I was doing it the fog would not go away until I waited about 15 minutes which was ridiculous. Shooting in freezing temperatures can be a pain if you’re not careful as to what you’re doing. If you decide to rush into a warm environment without packing up your lens properly then you may end up having to wait those 15 painful minutes and potentially miss an important shot. To avoid this simply place your camera in your bag with the lens cover on before you rush to get warm.


3. Consider Some Good Gloves

Shooting outside in the winter without gloves is a recipe for disaster so you should make sure to consider some photography friendly gloves before heading out into the cold. You can find these gloves online that will provide a proper grip for holding your camera combined with a material and design that doesn’t make it any harder to shoot. I would advise you not go into just any store and pick up a pair of gloves as some of them might not enable you to hold your camera properly or adjust your settings while shooting. Yes, your hands might be warm but they won’t be as functional as you need them to be.


4. Keep Gear Dry

Similar to doing photography in the rain, you want to apply the same principle to snow as well. Make sure to keep your gear dry by having a snow cover. The snow cover will help to keep your gear dry and minimize any possible liquid residue from damaging your equipment. You should be able to find a snow cover without breaking the bank as it is a worthy investment than having to replace any gear later down the line.

5. Dry Your Camera

If your camera just happens to get covered in snow while you’re shooting, it’s important to dry it off as soon as you get into a warm environment. Make sure to have a microfiber cloth or towel and let your camera sit in for a few hours so it can absorb any extra moisture that might be there. Failure to do this will result in small liquid residue getting into the electrical components of your camera and basically destroying it. I’m sure you don’t want this, so make it a priority to keep your camera dry.


6. Keep Yourself Warm

I’ll save the most important tip for last and urge you to keep yourself warm. There is no fun in doing winter photography while you’re shivering and hardly function. Remember to layer up or invest into a great winter photographer’s jacket or coat that will ensure you’re not freezing when outside. In addition to a good winter coat, you’ll need some great boots as well to help you not slip and slide all over the place when you’re shooting. Once you’ve acquired all these things and prepared yourself enough then you’re just about ready for a fun day of shooting in the winter.

A Photographer’s Journey To Toronto: Things to Consider

Have you ever thought about relocating and going all the way up north? Experience cold winter, beautiful fall, and the amazing summers. Excited to learn about new culture and explore a totally different country I recently moved from the beautiful Island of Jamaica and decided to live in the city of Toronto. Of course, many people asked me what inspired this move and what are my opinions for far. Well in this article I am going to share my journey within the past month of completely relocating to the city of Toronto. I still have so much to learn and filled with excitement to do so but already there are so many great things so let’s begin.


I often heard about how kind the people in Canada were while I was back in Jamaica but didn’t really believe it until I actually got here. Everyone you meet on the street or even in a coffee shop is willing to help you navigate your way around the city if you’re new or even visiting. I can assure you I have gotten lost in Toronto without mobile data a few times but I eventually stopped worrying because of the fear of asking someone help slowly disappeared. There are about 2.7 million people who live in the city of Toronto alone which is very shy of the 8.6 million who live in new york. I use New York as a comparison because of the city really reminds you of time square which I will talk about later on in the article.


The mixing pot of different cultures and ethnicities in the city of Toronto and the surrounding areas introduces not only a huge diversity but also different slangs that were inspired but these cultures. As a Jamaican, having moved here and still hear a few slangs from back home was very surprising to me but nonetheless, it was also comforting to know my culture came so far.


As I photographer from Jamaica, I am generally used to walking with my hands out and my camera either on my shoulder or around my neck at ready to shoot. This was a general practice of mine which enabled me to get great street shots and also amazing candids while on the go. However, all of that had to change once I moved to Toronto. The transition from tropical weather that always had double digits to weather in the north that is either single digits or extremely low was rough, to say the least. I often found myself keeping my hands completely in my pockets until they felt warm enough to be exposed to the cold again.


Of course, this rude awakening had me very surprised from a few weeks because I had to change my general routine to something completely different. Warm leather gloves became my best friend but it took a little while to get used to shooting with them on. I eventually became more comfortable and made it a habit to either have them in my bag or back pocket. Apart from my hands the weather also encouraged a whole new wardrobe filled with thick sweater tops, coats and a few pairs of boots. I can’t complain about the wardrobe change because without I would probably turn into a tropical popsicle.

The City

I must say the city of Toronto has inspired me to be creative in ways I actually did not imagine. Its mountainous buildings, neons signs, orange cabs, and busy roads have opened my eyes to so much more than what I was used to. I gradually became more interested and excited to explore low light photography. Walking around with my 50mm f/1.4 became as much of routine as breathing or brushing my teeth in the morning. I would never leave my home without it because there is always something new to see in a city that has so much to offer. In Kensington or “China Town” as they call it, the neon signs gift you with a beautiful reflection on wet concrete that you can’t help but capture.

The daily commute of over 2.7 million people also encouraged me to begin taking more candids of strangers. I have been caught a few times but the locals are very understanding and sometimes even welcome it. This was new to me as the culture in Jamaica is dramatically different in regard to street photography.


In addition to the welcoming locals, the city itself is also very clean and well organized, to say the least. After experiencing this I was motivated to go into the city as often as possible to see what the new thing for me to create. The city itself has been so inspiring that I’ve yet to actually have a photography session with a model or a talent which has also be surprising to me as well.

Toronto has opened my creative eye to a lot of things. One of which was to never be scared to try or venture into something you never practiced before and also not to be afraid or nervous to venture into these things. I am excited to see what the future has to offer me from the city of Toronto as I now call it my second home. Thank you guys so much for stopping by and reading this article and I hope to share more about this Journey soon. Until next time, take care.

5 Reasons Why Prime Lenses Are Better

This topic has been up for debate by a few photographer friends of mine and needs less to say it is still an ongoing debate which I found rather interesting. It has not only been a topic with a group of my close friends but something often discussed online as well amongst other photographers and I decided to share my view on why I think prime lenses are better than zoom lenses in just a few ways. Of course, these reasons are from personal experience and learning which brought me to the opinions I have no. Some of you may feel the same and some may not but here are some of the reasons why I think prime lenses are a lot better than zoom lenses.

1. Bokeh

One of my favorite reasons for using prime lenses is definitely the bokeh achieved when I’m shooting. Of course, as you know you can achieve a shallow depth of field in many different ways but its something about prime lenses that create bokeh so beautiful and appealing. Most if not all prime lenses tend to carry a very wide aperture such as f/1.4, f/1.8, f/1.2 and the list goes on and on.


It’s this wide open aperture that gives primes lenses the capability of capturing such beautiful and evenly blurred backgrounds. Zoom lenses don’t really carry the capability of having these low apertures with the exception of the Sigma 18-35mm which has an aperture of f/1.8. Zoom lenses will usually have at an aperture of about f/2.8 or higher. If it is lower than f/2.8 then it’s not by much either. The low aperture in primes lenses have proven to be an asset in many ways more than one but its capability of achieving amazing bokeh cannot be denied.

2. Low Light Photography

In addition to the first point made in regard to the low apertures that prime lenses are equipt with. It enables you to do low light photography with such ease. These wide open apertures will compensate a lot for your shutter and ISO values. With a wide-open aperture, you can probably change your ISO value from 1600 to about 400 very easily.

prime lenses

As you know, a high aperture can indeed add a lot of grain to your image and has the potential of ruining the image or giving you more work to do in post-production to make corrections. You now also have the freedom to bump your shutter speed up a bit to avoid any camera shakes or possible motion blur in your shots.

3. Light Traveling

Primes lenses are considerably lighter than zoom lenses and you can’t deny how easy they are to carry around. For example, a prime lens such as a 24mm f/2.8 or a 50mm f/1.8 can pretty much fit in your pocket or a handbag with ease. Most if not all telephoto lenses may require you to travel a little bit heavier due to their size. This can be a bit of a hassle if you’re traveling often especially in a daily commute.

prime lens

4. Sharper Images

If you do a test on both prime and zoom lenses then you will eventually notice that prime lenses tend to take considerably much sharper images than that of a zoom lens. There is not much extra glass inside a prime lens as compared to a zoom with more glass inside. As a result of there being less glass, you will experience less diffraction, which only goes up with the more pieces of glass there is in the lens.

5. Learning Curve

As I started out in photography, my camera came with the basic kit lenses one would expect to get with a DSLR. I gradually started to explore possibilities of what these kit lenses were capable of and over a period of time I found myself becoming bored with them and not getting what I expected or getting what I saw some of my favorite photographers were doing. Over this period of time, I was told that a 50mm lens is one of the first lenses a beginner in photography should get. I didn’t really understand why until I got my first 50mm in the mail. Very excited and filled with anticipation I ran for my camera and mounted it on it right away and I can assure you I fell in love instantly.

prime lens

Having a prime lens helped to teach me a lot more about the foundation of photography such as composition and your essential settings when shooting. This encouraged me to purchase other prime lenses such as a 24mm and 85mm which up to this day I do not regret getting. Primes lens help to teach you a lot about photography without you even really noticing it and that is the beauty in owning a prime lens.

5 Common Mistakes Made In Street Photography

In my expert opinion, I would say that street photography is not one of the easiest genres of photography but it can produce so many great images. The best thing in street photography is that everything is captured in real time and cannot be faked or replicated more than once. Each image has its own unique style, meaning, and elements in the frame. Street photography can also be subjective to where you live, for example, if you live in a city or suburbs. You will find that photographers who live close to a city are capable of capturing more captivating street shots than those who live in a suburban area. In this article, I will be sharing with you the top 5 mistakes that are commonly made in street photography and how to correct them. Some of these mistakes were even made by me as a beginner and sometimes even now as a professional so I urge you not to feel embarrassed or discouraged because none of us are actually perfect at what we do.

1. Letting Fear Get The Best Of You

Most of us are guilty of this first mistake. Doing street photography in fear will not bring you much reward or shots because the best shots, you just have to go for it. I used to be afraid myself to take out my camera and capture a shot of strangers walking or to actually just take out my camera at in public to practice street photography. The mentality I had was that everyone is gonna see me and I’m going to draw a bunch of attention to myself. I started to care more about how others feel about the camera than how I felt about getting the shots I want. This hindered me from getting what could be some pretty amazing shots in my past but I’ve refused to let it hold me back now.

street photography

To get over this fear you should make it a habit to walk with optimism and positivity. Make sure to be polite and ask the stranger permission first before you take a single portrait of them. Don’t be afraid to get close and be in the middle because the people around you will never really know what it is you’re capturing. Make it a habit to just think about you and your camera and nothing else. Once you’ve developed that state of mind, you will become more comfortable when shooting in the street. However, this is an issue you have to deal with very quickly or else you will not get the shots you need and will remain timid.

2. Low ISO

I used to believe in the rule that shooting at a low ISO when doing street photography is the best option. This has proven to be a mistake as the advancement of cameras over the years has allowed photographers like myself to shoot at a high ISO without having to compromise my image with grain. A low ISO is obviously subjective to what it is you’re shooting but when it comes to street photography it’s not the best option.

street photography

During street photography, you are forced to shoot at a high shutter speed, preferably 1/250 or higher depending on your lighting conditions. We need this shutter speed high because street photography is very spontaneous and you need to have a freeze frame of whatever it is your subject is doing. In addition to having a high shutter speed, I would also recommend a high aperture value as well. Anywhere between f/8 – f/16 should be pretty good. The reason for this is also related to the fact that your subject will more than likely be moving at an unpredictable rate. In the event that they are moving fast, would want to be able to have a large depth of field just in case you miss the main focus, the rest of your shot is still pretty sharp so you can make adjustments in post-production.

3. Don’t Move Too Fast

Try not to be so caught up looking for the next subject that you’re walking fast and missing the great things that are already around you. Take your time and observe where you are and let that dictate your shots because moving fast with distract you from what’s just around the corner. Street photography takes a little patience but the patience you put in will give you a reward you will appreciate later so try to take it slow.

street photography

4. Not Getting Close Enough

This mistake a lot of us make is not getting close enough to our subject because we are too scared or we just panic. A wide shot is always good in street photography but there may be a lot of moving objects or people that will distract viewers from the main subject in your frame. Get close and make sure you isolate what it is you would like viewers to see in your frame, otherwise they will be distracted by everything else.

street photography

5. Glued To The Viewfinder

I know you need to look through your viewfinder to compose your shots but don’t be distracted by the viewfinder too much that you forget to just use your eyes. Being distracted by looking through the viewfinder all the time will limit you from seeing the bigger picture as your field of view is limited. Your eyes are the true viewfinder and should be your primary tool when looking for shots during street photography. Keep your head up and your eyes alert so when you do actually see your shot then you can bring up your camera and capture your frame. Street photography is a beautiful thing but its all about timing, patience and being fearless. Once you’ve mastered all these things then you have nothing to worry about.

Wedding Photography: Must Have Shots for the Album

Wedding albums are like very fragile projects that are curated by us as photographers. When it comes to wedding photography, you don’t really have much of an opportunity to recreate a lot of shots as some of them are genuine at the moment and asking to recreate those shots would take away so much from the sincerity of it.

Wedding photography is an amazing privilege because as the photographer you now play a key roll in creating and capturing the best memories for your bride and groom. Speaking of memories, in this article, I will be sharing with you some of my tops must have shots when doing a wedding. These shots, if available, are important to have on your shot list or apart of your wedding album. Some of these shots might be subjective to what is immediately available to you and others are just some shots that can be captured at any traditional wedding. Let’s begin!

1. The Girls Getting Prepared

As a wedding photographer or if you’re doing your first wedding then you should know you will always spend more time with the bridesmaids than with the groomsmen for a few reasons. The first reason is pretty obvious with it being the brides big day, the spotlight is a lot more on her than anyone else.


It’s always a good idea to get as many shots with the bride and her girls being emotional, goofy and just getting their self together. This helps to create a story and also encourage future stories when the girls look back on those photos and recollect exactly what was happening when that shot was taken. In addition to giving the bride the attention she deserves, there is also the fact that women take an extended time to get ready as opposed to men. You will more than likely find yourself getting a huge variety of shots from just the bridal preparation and about half or less than that amount when capturing the groom’s men.

2. Bride Getting Into Her Dress

There’s nothing a bird cherishes more than her wedding dress and her wedding ring. For a bride fitting and looking good in her wedding dress is in the pinnacle of her day, next to saying “I do” to the person she loves. It is imperative that you capture this majestic transition as she puts on her dress and gets get the final touches together for her big day. You will often find that if the mother or someone who is very close to the bride helping her to get dressed and put it on. To the best of your ability, also try to capture that shot as it also a very emotional day for that person as well.


3. The Groomsmen

It’s time to show the guys some attention and see what they’re up to. I promise you that the guys will more than likely be ready before the women but there are some key shots you should get as well during their preparation. Depending on the groomsmen and the groom, it might not be as emotional as the bridesmaids but it will be emotional nonetheless. Some of the shots you want to get with the groomsmen consist of them having casual guy conversations, filled with jokes and evident jovial things. I usually include shots where the best man is helping the groom get prepared by helping him with his outfit.


4. Details

I’m sure you must have had this on your shot list or memorized but this will serve as a reminder. Details are everything and will stand out in your batch of images. Pay attention to find things such as details in the bride’s dress and the groom’s outfit. Capture details all the way down to the socks he will be wearing. These shots help to piece the story altogether and leaves no space for anything to be questioned. The key thing to do is create a story through your images that will last forever.


5. The Rings

This is the single most cliche wedding shot but it also a shot that is compulsory for every wedding you will do. The rings symbolize a bond and commitment that the couple has made to each other. Not to mention that the price tag on some of these wedding rings are probably 5 times the amount you’re getting paid to photograph the wedding so never forget to ask for the rings to capture them in your own creative way. Might I add to be very careful with them as well during your creative process and if possible, have an assistant or the wedding planner help you in curating the shots and give them back immediately after you’re finished.


6. The Brides Entrance

When the bride enters and does her ceremonial walk, all eyes will be on her and your camera should be as well. This ceremonial walk will probably be one of the most majestic moments throughout the whole day. It’s at this moment that the guest and sometime even the groom himself will start to shed tears due to the beauty of it all.


7. The Kiss

The ceremonial kiss will be the highlight of the day and the beginning of something beautiful for this couple. This is a shot that you cannot miss at all cost and I would recommend doing the continuous shooting for this moment while capturing as many angles as possible. The kiss is something that will be framed and cherished by the couple and it’s only right that the moment it is captured, it is done to the best of your ability.


How To Prepare For a Maternity Session

A maternity session is one of the single most beautiful things to experience and have the privilege to work on as a photographer. Before my first maternity shoot, I didn’t really know what to expect other than a mother who is expecting, a father and maybe a younger child. I searched through Pinterest nights before to get some inspiration but nothing really prepared me to see the magic I did when doing a maternity session. As the photographer, you are entrusted and privileged to be in charge of helping this mother or couple tell a story to their child in the future about they came to be a blessing to them. In this article, we will be discussing some of the things you need to do in order to prepare for a maternity shoot. So let’s go.

1. Seek Inspiration

Maternity shoots can be a very tricky session if you’ve not already planned out your shots and poses. If you’re lucky you might end up with a mother or couple who already know what they want and what they are looking for and then, on the other hand, you might run into a couple or mother who just wants some great pictures and leaves all the creativity up to you. In both instances, I urge you to be completely prepared and seek inspiration from different platforms such as Pinterest and Instagram. Both these platforms are promised to give you some amazing ideas as to the things you can do outside the box to make your client or clients happy.


Also, don’t be scared to get created with the ideas yourself and put your spin on the things that inspired you to capture a particular frame. This way, you will probably create a style that someone else will see and it will inspire them as well. Maternity shoots can consist of so many shots and no more to be sure to give your clients value for their dollar and give them a variety of different angles and perspective. Having done this and prepared your posing idea, the actual day of the session should be a breeze for you.

2. Communicate With The Mother Or Couple

Try to have an open line of communication with the couple as to what it is they’re expecting and what it is you’d like to do as well. This helps to eliminate any possible confusion that might happen during the session. Mothers who are expecting don’t always have all the time in the world as some of them can pop at any moment so you might not want to be wasting any time on the day of the shoot. Communicating effectively will help the mother or couple as well to prepare themselves for shoot day as they pick outfits and also give feedback on the ideas you’ve presented to them.


3. Gear

In regards to gear, there are just a few things you will need to have ready before you begin a maternity session. The first thing you’d need to choose wisely is the lens or lenses you plan to use on that day. Personally, I recommend either using a 50mm f/1.8 to give you that lovely, dream-like blur in the background of your image. It’s lightweight and pretty easy to carry around on your DSLR while providing superb images as well. If you’re not a fan of using the 50mm then you could also consider a 24-70mm lens which gives you a variation between a wide angle shot or a close-up.

I am personally not a fan of wide-angle shots when it comes to maternity shoots because sometimes wide and be too wide and then you end up not placing much emphasis on the mother. However, a few wide angle shots depending on your location can be pretty amazing as well. For that reason, I would recommend having your 24-70mm f/2.8 just in case.


Make sure to have all your batteries charged as well as having your memory card cleared and ready to capture as many shots as possible because mothers who are expecting or couples love to have a wide variety of options to choose from to share in the future. With all these things in place, you should be perfectly ready for a day of maternity shooting.

4. Be Patient

Mothers who are expecting are not always the fastest on their feet and as a result, you should be prepared to be patient and not to rush anything. This session might take a bit longer than you expected due the mother being very careful as well making sure she is not in any pain or discomfort. Ensure that the mother to be is okay and comfortable with the poses before you begin to shoot and if she is not, communicate with her and find out how she can be adjusted into a better and more comfortable position.


Motherhood is a beautiful thing to witness and to be hired to capture the moments leading up to it is as special as being hired for a wedding. You are trusted to capture these important moments in the life of others so they have memories to hold on to throughout time. I appreciate you stopping by to read this article and until next time, take care.

How To Prepare For A Wedding

Weddings are probably one of the most popular things that most photographers specialize in. Not only is it great income when it comes down to wedding season but its also a privilege to be paid to capture moments that a couple will hold on to forever. This helps you to realize that a piece of your work will always remind them of that special day when their lives became one.

Wedding photography to a beginner might probably give them the worst anxiety and it will feel like you’re about to take a very complex exam. On the contrary, it is probably one of the most beautiful ceremonies you will capture and be a part of. In this article, I aim to educate and give some tips as to how you can make yourself prepared for a wedding as a beginner or even if you’re a professional shooting a wedding for the first time.

1. Get To Know Them

I always recommend to my fellow photographers to make an effort to know the couple as best as they can. Getting to know a couple helps you to understand not only their personality but their style as well. Each couple is different so there is a chance that the game plan you used on the last wedding you did, probably won’t work on the next one. Once you’ve made the effort do this, you begin to build a relationship with them which makes capturing them in their element on their wedding day so much easier.


In addition, it puts less stress on your shoulders because you already have an idea of what it is they like and also what it is you need to capture that will mean something special to them. For example, I did a wedding where the chairs for the guests had mason jars attached to them. The mason jars were filled with sand not only because the wedding was being held on a beach but it was also the same beach at which the couple met. During their ceremony, they decided to pour their individual jars of sand into one jar which would signify their life now becoming one. All of this I learned from meeting the couple and getting to know them which made it that much more important for me to capture those shots because I knew what it meant to them.

2. Create A Schedule

Some photographers don’t believe in this and just wing it but I make it my duty because of how I’m a little organized. I recommend creating a schedule or rather a shot list to ensure you cover all your bases. With this short list, you will stay on track as to what it is you need to get and what you haven’t gotten as yet. Many times I’ve made the mistake on not creating a shot list or a schedule which resulted in me missing shots that I would’ve loved to capture for the couple. A wedding can be very fast passed and make you easily distracted so make an effort to create a schedule or shot list for yourself.


3. Bring some Help

If possible, I would recommend having a second shooter with you to help you capture different perspectives. Having a second shooter can be so helpful in the sense that it not only takes a huge load of the work off just you alone but it helps in the variation of shots achieved. In addition to that, having a second shooter or an assistant will help to keep you on schedule with your shot list just to make sure you don’t miss anything.

4. Do A Run Through

Make an effort to be early to the venue or the location where the wedding is being held or if possible, go there a day or two before the date of the wedding. Just like as you would with a regular photography session, you should do some location scouting. This helps you to create a series of ideas as to how and where you’re going to capture images of the couple. It also works well with your shots list as you can make an adjustment and know where particular shots will be for the bridal party and groomsmen and special spots for just the couple themselves.


5. Stay Connected

Make sure to have a line of connection to whoever is in charge of the wedding ceremony. You never know if you might need a hand with something or need something done so you can get a particular shot. The wedding planner or coordinator is there to help you so don’t be afraid to ask and get what you need to get done. Weddings are often a once in a lifetime thing so make sure you do whatever it takes to get a shot that will last that couple for a lifetime as well.

I hope this article was a great help in preparing you for your first or your next upcoming wedding. It’s always a pleasure to help so until next time, thank you for stopping by.

What To Get A Videographer For Christmas

The season of giving is almost here and some of us need to get prepared and figure out what it is to get some of our creative friends such as videographers and photographers. However today we will mainly be focusing on the videographer aspect so don’t worry I’m here to help you out. Getting a gift for a videographer can be a bit tricky especially if you’re not in the field or videography yourself. If your a photographer wondering what to get your friends who’re videographer then you might have an idea but for those of you who are beginners or have no prior knowledge of the field, this article should stand as a great help. Also if you’re a videographer and just want to send your loved ones a hint as to what it is you want, feel free to share this article as well and it should help you out, so let begin with some of the perfect gifts you can get a videographer for Christmas.

1. Camera Bag

This is a simple but very handy gift to get a videographer or even a photographer. A videographer generally carries around a lot more equipment than that of a photographer. All this equipment can be heavy and not to mention a lot when traveling to different projects. Having an efficient weatherproof camera bag would make the transit to these projects a lot easier.

camera bag

You can easily find great camera bags online for a very affordable cost or at your local camera store. Before purchasing the bag, be sure to look out for things such as how many compartments are with the bag, if it will protect gear against things such as rain or snow and strap padding. As I said, all the gear carried by videographers can be very heavy but with great padding in the straps of the bag, it makes it a lot easier. Great camera bags generally start at a price of $50 USD and up the fancier the bag gets. However, you’re sure to find one that matches the needs of the videographer you buying it for at just the right price.

2. External Hard Drive

You can never go wrong with getting a digital creative an external hard drive. As creatives, we always need more space to store away our projects once they are done or to just add content to our library. If you are looking to get an external hard drive then you can take a look at a previous article I shared about some of the top external hard drives to consider. External hard drives vary in prices depending on the brand as well as the capacity of the hard drive itself.

hard drive

The best hard drives capacity to get a videographer is about 2TB or 4TB. I say this because the files done by videographers are a lot larger than those done by photographers so they will always be thankful for the huge additional space they have. Be sure to pay close attention to the specs of each hard drive you’re considering before purchasing them. External Hard Drives can easily be found online at a very affordable price that won’t put a dent in your pocket.

3. Headphones

As weird as it may sounds, headphones are some videographers best friend next to their camera. During their post-production, they need a headphone to either select the right song for the video they’ve shot or pay close attention to the audio taken in the video so they can work on that as well. A huge part of videography is the music or audio that comes along with it as this can make or break the video you’re making. Headphones are pretty popular today so it really should be hard to find one of good quality.


Of course, you will have the big brands that provide excellent audio but those also come with a big price tag. If you’re looking to be cost effective then no worries you will easily find some great headphones. However, before checking out online, make sure to read reviews and if in store then give them a test before going forward with your purchase.

4. A GoPro

If you’re really looking to make the videographers Christmas then you consider looking into action cameras such as a GoPro. Gopro has changed the game of videography every since its inception into the creative world and it has continued to uphold its reputation as one of the best action cameras to have on your person. These action cameras can be generally expensive depending on which version GoPro you’re getting as well as the accessories that might with it as a bundle. You can never lose with giving a videographer this as a gift because the more cameras a videographer has, gives them the freedom to capture different perspectives which everyone loves. You can easily check online and take a look at the prices as they may vary depending on the seller.


I truly hope this article has lent a helping hand if getting the right gift for your fellow videographer. It’s the season of giving so don’t forget those sales and try to make someone’s holidays that much better. Thank you for stopping by and until next time, enjoy the holidays!

Wedding Photography: How To Work With A Bridezilla

Weddings are probably one of the most beautiful and sacred events to do as a photographer. You are trusted with the responsibility of capturing every detail and memory of the ceremony which encompasses two people making a promise to each other to share their life together. As someone who’ve done weddings a bunch of times, I can appreciate the emotional atmosphere that comes with it. Something else I can also appreciate and understand is the stress that comes with it as well, not only for the photographer but for the individuals involved. You will mostly find that in most couples, the woman/bride or a wedding planner is the person in charge of getting the wedding done properly.

Even if it isn’t the bride herself who is in charge, she will eventually find a way to make sure everything is going as planned for her big day. Anything out of line may cause a meltdown because of all of these emotions that are in the atmosphere on that day. In this article, I will be sharing with you some tips that just might save you from getting cursed out by a bridezilla. For those who are not sure as to what a bridezilla is, the term can commonly be explained as an overly demanding and boss bride on her wedding day. A bridezilla will definitely come in different ways but the behavior is usually the same. As the photographer, you may just end up in the line of fire when working with a bridezilla but these tips will help you to manage and avoid that from happening.

1. Understanding

The first step to managing a bridezilla is to understand her perspective and where she’s coming from. There almost a guarantee that she won’t be that same demanding or condescending person when the wedding is over but she is that way now because of the situation at hand. To understand bridezilla you have to put yourself in her shoes. Please don’t try this literally. Try to view things whereas she is worried and trying to prevent any hiccups or issue from happening that might hinder or cause embarrassment at her ceremony. This is also why brides carefully pick who they invite and seat the guests accordingly. Once you’ve come to an understand and she has established that you get it, things will become that much easier.

2. Listen

When she talks, just listen. If you’re a photographer who’s already married or in a committed relationship then this tip probably shouldn’t come as any surprise to you. A bridezilla likes to know that her demands are being heard and met as best as possible. As soon as she starts to give you orders as the photographer just listen and show no sign of confusion or discomfort.


Once you’ve heard all her demands, make it your duty to ask if she needs anything else just so you don’t miss anything and there was a full line of communication between you both. I can guarantee you, the bride will be more concerned about the images than the groom unless the groom himself is a photographer as well or as meticulous as his bride to be. Nonetheless, make sure to listen and cover all your bases as much as possible. Because the moment a bridezilla catches you slacking off or not meeting the expectations she has, then you’re in trouble.

3. Make Jokes

If you see an opening to lighten the mood and crack a few jokes then I recommend you take the opportunity. Those few hours before the ceremony can be filled with stress, anxiety, and emotions all in one mixing pot. This often results in either a tense or stress filled atmosphere which doesn’t help for pictures, nor does it help when the bride is stressed about her day and not as excited as she should be. So I encourage you to break the ice and share a joke or few with her so she becomes comfortable but not too much for the groom to get jealous. A comfortable and relax bride makes for some gorgeous images and I can promise you that she will appreciate them when the ceremony is all done and gone.

4. Be Flexible

In my last tip, I encourage you to be ready for anything. To the best of your ability, always be prepared to shoot even if you don’t have to because you never know when the bride might ask for something specific and you being unprepared might just not make her so happy. Bridezilla is always on edge and can often be spotted from a mile away so try to always be ready to give them what they want and make them as happy as possible before and during their ceremony. It often becomes easier during the reception because the most important part of the is pretty much over with and it is now time for everyone to relax and share a toast to the bride and groom.


I hope these tips were helpfully in tackling a bridezilla while at a wedding. In a next article, I will be sharing some more tips as to how you can become prepared for a wedding. Until next time, thank you so much for stopping by.

How To Capture Great Candids This Holiday Season

Its the season of giving and having all your friends and loved ones around to not only share gifts and kind words but to also share memorable moments that cannot be replicated or replaced. The holiday season is always special as family members and friends from all over the world make the effort to be under one roof for the spirit of Christmas. As a kid, I always had a special love for the holiday season as there’s just a blanket of love that is spread throughout everywhere along with the fact that my birthday is on Christmas eve so I had no choice but to be in the spirit of Christmas. These special moments are always worthy of being captured so that they can outlive the hands of time and be shared with those who unfortunately couldn’t make it to the special occasion this holiday or for future reference when the family gets together to look through the Christmas album from the last Christmas. In this article, we will be touching on some key things to do when trying to capture these golden candid moments during your holidays this year. This tips will be helpful if you’re a beginner or even a professional as they’ve surely come in handy for me being behind the camera a few holidays in a row.

1. Be Ready

When it comes to candids, especially during the holiday season, you want to always be prepared to capture the moments happening in front of you. Some of these moments will obviously be spontaneous so always be ready to go at any second. You can best prepare for this by doing some random test shots to make sure your lighting or settings are good enough to capture the scene well enough. This will help you to not be caught off guard and miss any key moments that might have been valuable. Telling a story is very important and you want to make sure the story is pieced together well as much as possible.

christmas season

2. Shoot Continuously

Set your camera to shoot continuously when taking photos this holiday season. Don’t worry about the volume of photos you’re taking as you will be able to eliminate the bad ones later. Take into consideration that each second you capture is another moment in time that cannot easily be replaced or replicated at all for that matter. When shooting continuously, you have the freedom when going through the images to select what it is that adds to your story and what is deemed a bad photo. It is always better to be safe than sorry so never stop shooting.

3. Angles

Make sure to move around and constantly change your perspective when capturing different moments. If you stay in one position for the whole duration then you will eventually end up taking what seems to be the same or similar shots. In photography, angles or perspectives are a game changer and simply changing your angle or perspective can help to give a moment or a scene a whole different look.

christmas season

For example, when a family member is opening a gift, you don’t want to be shooting only on their level but rather get some overhead shots of the process of them opening their gift and then change your angle again to probably capture their reaction to the gift they just opened. Shooting from one position the entire time will eventually end up being a headache or annoying when you’re reviewing the images and notice there is not much diversity to the moment you were supposed to capture properly.

5. Pay Attention To The Background

There will be times when you want to pay a little bit of attention to what’s in the background of your frame for a few reasons. Sometimes what’s in the background of your frame might not be the most appealing thing to whats in the foreground. Many things can contribute to the bad background during the holiday season such as bad facial reactions, messy background or anything that doesn’t contribute to your image itself. Simple things like these can easily ruin a shot that had the potential to be amazing or end up giving you a lot of work to do during post-production.

6. Pick A Theme Or Mood

As the photographer, you now have the power or authority to dictate as to what will be the mood or them of the images you’re taking. You can determine the mood of each moment and capture it accordingly. For example, you will be able to judge if the moment happening in front of you is that of an emotional or exciting one and then contemplate if it worth capturing or not. You always want to have a very balanced holiday album with just the right amount of comedy, excitement, and emotions throughout the images. This will help to tell a very vivid story of how the holiday season was this year and make it easier for others to experience it as well, regardless of them not being physically there as well.

christmas season

It’s always a pleasure sharing these very useful tips with you. I hope this holiday season brings you lot’s joy, love, and gifts because what are the holidays without a few gifts here and there. Until next time, thank you so much for stopping by and giving this article a read and I look forward to seeing you again as always.

Children Christmas Photography

In a previous article, we spoke a bit about how you could capture some amazing shots of Christmas decorations both inside and out. This festive season I would like to share a few more tips with you just to make sure this Christmas brings you nothing but pure joy. You could probably consider this an early gift or a gift that keeps on giving. Today we will be talking about how you can capture some adorable shots during Christmas of the little babies or kids. When I was a child I could remember always looking forward to this season, not only because my birthday was the day before Christmas but it was the season of gifts and amazing food from the family. As a child, Christmas was nothing short of amazing with new toys and sometimes even money from family members. However, as we become adults, Christmas becomes an expense and we become more excited about the food than the gifts or sometimes even both. This does not mean that we can’t make it amazing for the little humans around us and let them enjoy as we did back when we were their age as well. These tips should help any beginner or professional to capture young children during this festive season.

1. Do Test Shots

The first thing you might want to start off with is testing the lighting. Run a few quick test shots just to get your essential settings and lens right before you begin. I recommend this for one very important reason. When shooting children, you more than likely might not have a second chance of catching an authentic but perfect shot.


As a result of this, you want to always be ready for whatever this situation may be. Kids are sometimes unpredictable so being prepared is always one of the best things to do. Once you’ve made the changes needed to your settings, its time to now do the second step.

2. Candids

The second step is to just start taking pictures without any warning or notice. This also gives you additional time probably try a few extra test shots before you start to actually shoot. Candids make for the best story and not only is it authentic but it’s that one second in time that cannot be replicated and completely the same. When capturing children, demanding their attention is probably one of the worst things you could do because not every child will give you as much attention as you’d wish to capture your shot but when you catch them off guard, I can promise you that it makes for some of the cutest images.

3. Give Them Something To Play With

Kids are very easily fascinated as well as easily distracted. With all the Christmas decorations and things around, it won’t be hard to find something to grab their attention. Something I would recommend is using lights. Of course, this should be within the safe space of other adult or supervision. The light will not only catch their eye but it also makes for a great light source for an amazing shot. Photography is all about capturing light and manipulating it as well. Utilize the lights around you as a creative tool to make a great shot.


4. Tell A Story

As a photographer, this is one of your natural jobs and as such this should come as no surprise to you. Use your images and tell a story of whatever was happening that day, not only with the children but with everyone else around the children as well. To this, I would recommend you shoot continuously to capture as many frames as you can. When the time comes for post-production, you can then easily eliminate those that don’t help in the narration of your story and keep those that do. You are the storyteller so don’t be afraid to create an amazing one.


5. Composition

Your composition is key, not only in Photographing children but as well as in photography overall. When taking pictures of kids during the season, try to either make them the center of the image or fill the frame up with elements that help give meaning to the images. For example, an image of a child holding a string of lights in amazement helps for an amazing shot but an image of a child holding a string of lights while being surrounded by gifts might even make for a better shot. Therefore, make it a habit to check your composition and make sure your frames have meaning, not only for the parents to see and enjoy but for your pleasure as well.

I’m always happy to give you guys some helpful tips to capture memorable shots and I look forward to doing so again. Thank you so much for stopping by and until next time, take care.

Christmas Decoration Photography

It’s almost the most wonderful time of the year and some of us are already slowly pulling out the Christmas lights and all the decorations to put inside and on the outside of the home. Apart from this being one of my favorites season of the year, I’m excited to share some tips with you as to how you can capture some memorable Christmas decorations shots to add to your Christmas album and share with the family.

Doing Photography at Christmas brings a lot more joy than one would expect because each shot has a very sentimental meaning, similar to when you’re photographing a wedding. Each shot taken will be cherished and shared in the future with other family members and friends. This article will also be helpful if you’re a beginner looking to capture some great shots during the season so let’s begin.

1. Tripod

I think myself along with many other photographers have mentioned tripods so much that it sounds just as important as walking around with your lens. Your tripod will be your best friend when photographing the decorations outside of a house or building for many reasons. One of the most important reasons is stability. You will more than likely be capturing some shots in very low light situations.

Low light situations mean you will be shooting at a low shutter speed with a high ISO and your aperture will vary depending on how you want your shot to look. With a low shutter speed, you cannot have too much movement as this will result in camera shake and eventually ruin your shots. Therefore, make a tripod a priority on your list of things to have when shooting Christmas decorations.

2. Lens

When shooting decorations, whether it be inside or outside, there are a few lenses that will come in handy. Since we started by shooting decorations outside, my first recommendation would be to use a wide angle low aperture lens.

christmas decorations

A 35mm or 24mm f/2.8 might be wide enough to capture your subject and get a great edge to edge sharpness from your shot. In addition to those wide angles lenses, you could also fool around with a 50mm f/1.8 or f/1.4 to get more variations and that soft depth of field blur that everyone loves so much.

3. No Flash

As best as you can, try not to use flash. When it comes to shooting decorations, it’s all about the lights and the pretty colors. Using a flash might damage the color profile of the lights and give you a substantial amount of post-production work to do just to correct the colors in your shot.

4. Shutter Speed

We will basically be doing low light photography so you can expect to be shooting at a slow shutter speed to capture all the colors you can. Depending on the lighting situation, you can test how slow you will need your shutter to be and check your LCD screen after. It won’t take that long to get the right shutter speed but I recommend starting at about 1/25 and work your way down from there if you need it to be slower. If it’s too slow then feel free to do the opposite and then gage your sweet spot and begin to shoot from there.

5. ISO

Speaking of shutter speed brings me to our next essential setting which is your ISO. When doing these low light shots for Christmas decorations, you don’t want to have your ISO too high and introduce a bunch of noise into your shot. I recommend starting at about 400 and work your way up or down from there. I strongly recommend however that you do not try to push your ISO too high. If you do so, it will result in your shot being overwhelmed by noise and becoming unappealing or creating to much work during post-production.

6. Aperture

Depending on the limitations of the lens you’re shooting with, I would recommend trying the lowest aperture level first and then work your way up. Always keep in mind that the higher your aperture level is the darker things will get and the lower your aperture level is the brighter things will get. Try to test different values and see which best works out for you.

christmas decoration

7. Fill Your Frame

Try involve different elements into your shot and not let seem like a plain shot of just lights. If possible, Include some snow, water or even just some wet concrete to act as a reflective surface and add some dynamic to your shot. You will be surprised as to the result when you give this a try. It will make your shot more interesting and that much more appealing.

As usual, it’s always a pleasure sharing some assume tips with you to use in your day to day photography. As the season draws closer, stay safe and remember to have fun.

Mobile Photography and How Has it Shaped Our Lives

In previous articles, we’ve spoken so much about the advancement of photography and mobile photography as it regards to what has changed and the tools that can help to improve the skills of those who want to begin. Given that there is so much to talk about and share as it regards to mobile photography, in the article we will be discussing the evolution of mobile photography itself. The days of photography being confined to only a set group of people have come to an end. In today’s world, as long as you have a smartphone with a camera, you’re capable of being a photographer if you want. This has inspired individuals to become travel bloggers and begin to share their story with others over social media platforms.

These social media platform not only changed the game in photography but it also changed the game in how we socialize and go about our daily lives. Social media platforms have created a bridge for creatives like myself and others to easily get to where they need to in their career. However, for us to appreciate where we are now, let’s talk a bit about where we’re coming from.

Back Then

Some of you might be old enough to remember some of these things and for those who have no idea, I will share some history with you. Mobile phones weren’t equipt with a camera until about the early 2000s. Back then if you had a mobile phone with a camera built in if you were just about affluent and fancy. Back then the mobile phones available were shooting at about 0.11 or 0.35 megapixels. Can you imagine how much of a joke some of those images would be to photographers or bloggers now? Some if not all of these cameras were also only able to save at least 20 images and no more. So if you plan on taking some pictures on a particular day, then you better choose wisely.

As time progressed and some years past, manufacturers began to include flash on their newer model phones. I’m not sure if at this moment they could’ve been considered smartphones as yet so I will leave them at mobile phones. Things like self-timer, zoom and other features started to be added to some of these mobile cameras. However, the phones were still limited in what they have to over and most of them were stuck at just offering 1.3 megapixels which were a huge jump from just 0.11 if you ask me but this still wasn’t enough.

mobile phone

As we drew closer to late 2010 we started to see just a preview of what the future of mobile photography and mobile phones could be. Touchscreen phones were introduced, capable of capturing video, panoramic images at more. This was a huge step for the mobile phone and It was also just in time. Pinterest made their platform available to the public in March 2010 and Instagram made their imprint on the market on the 6th of October, that same year. All of these things combined in the year 2010, changed the world of mobile photography and how we share photo and ideas forever. In addition to that, if you remember, It was around that same time that Apple released their iPhone 4.


Fast forward a few years and there have been many phone releases each year and sometime these releases consisted of 2 or more new model phones being released at once. This brought us to the age of having smartphones. We were not capable of carrying around devices that were able to be of assistance with our day to day lives in many ways other than just making a call. The cameras became more advanced and were not able to not only capture better quality images but record amazing videos as well. This encouraged a lot of individuals to invest in a good enough smartphone to now make use of all the platforms and technology now available at their fingertips.

mobile phone

Today, we have phones that are capable of shooting a minimum of 12 megapixels and capture video at a stunning 4k video quality, easily. Not to mention the storage capacity we now have is unparalleled and only makes it more exciting to see what’s to come in the future. The evolution of mobile photography has been nothing short of amazing and gives you a different perspective on how far we’ve come and where we are going. Amazing smartphones along with amazing apps have shaped how we do mobile photography today and more than likely will continue to do so tomorrow as we grow to appreciate it.

Speaking of appreciation, as usual, I would like to thank you for taking the time to read this article and I hope it helped to educate you on just how far the age of mobile photography has come and where it might be going in the next few years. Thank you and see you soon!

How To Capture Great Winter Portraits: Beginners Edition

In a previous article, we spoke a bit about how you can prepare yourself to carry out winter photography and pretty much not end up like a popsicle of have your camera destroyed by the elements. However, in this article, we will be discussing a step further as we dive into how you can create some amazing portraits in the winter that will make your viewers think its summer because of how hot the image is. That was probably a bad joke but without dragging this intro out any longer, let us begin.

1. Lens

The first thing you need to consider before going outside to shoot is which lens to use. This is usually an easy process for me cause my go-to lens when it comes to portraits is the Canon 50mm f/1.4. It’s a beast when it comes to low light photography as well as capturing some pretty amazing portraits shots. My favorite thing about capturing portraits outdoors in the winter is that awesome evenly blurred background you get with all the snow in the back of your frame.

winter portrait

If I, unfortunately, forgot my 50mm or just didn’t remember to pack it, I then lean on to my 85mm. The 85mm provides about the same effect as the 50mm and often even does a better job than the 50mm. However, I am not a huge fan of it due to its focal length and weight. The 50mm is easy to carry around and pretty much fit in my pocket If I need it to, not to mention its perfect focal length. With that said, the perfect lens for portraits in the winter and portraits overall throughout the seasons is definitely a 50mm of your choice.

2. Timing

In the winter, unlike summer, the days are a bit shorter. For example, currently, in Toronto, we can expect sunset by at least 4:30 and then by 4:45 it’s completely dark outside. With that said you want to make sure you choose the right time to get a solid 1-hour shoot in before things start to become dark. Also, make it a habit of checking the weather in your location so you can choose the right day and be prepared for what’s to come.


3. Exposure

It’s very easy to get a blown out image when photographing a subject with snow in it because snow itself is very bright. I usually recommend running a few test shots as the light will change frequently to make sure you’re not a victim of this. Pay close attention to your high lights and shadows before you capture your shot as it is easy to lose detail in post-production.

4. Tripod

You guys know I’m always going to recommend using a tripod when you have anything portrait wise to be done. The tripod will help you capture every fine detail in your frame without running into any issues. In addition to that, it gives your hand a break from time to time when doing a session.

5. Composition

Having the right composition is always key because there is always a chance that the image your taking has been taken by a hundred other photographers who had the same Idea as you in regards to the composition of their shot. Try to put a twist on whatever you’re doing and place your subject in odd sections of your frame to make an image that much different than someone else’s.

winter portrait

Don’t be afraid to experiment a bit and see what you can create because it’s always great to try and fail than to have never tried at all in the first place. Dear to be different and make your portraits stand out more than the next guy’s. If there are different elements like trees around you then find a way to incorporate these things into your frame. Some of the best images were never planned so don’t be afraid to create on your feet.

6. Add Some Color

Winter is probably the least colorful time of the year as opposed to the fall season. Everything is either white or brown and this can make your shots seem so lifeless and pale at the same time. To fix this I usually recommend adding some color in post-production, using elements around you such as pine trees to add some color or instructing your talent to swear something that has some color in it. An of these three things will help you to make your images stand out more and not seem like a dull winter image. If possible, capture your subject during sunset or golden hour as the sun will give a nice glare of orangey brown to your shot. Having a color in Winter portraits is one of the best things you can do to make your image stand out more in addition to a great composition.

How To Record Videos With DSLR Cameras

Doing videos has noticeably been becoming a bit more popular than capturing still images for some reason. I personally think this trend has been influenced by social media as more individuals are encouraged to capture videos on their phone or even their camera to either upload to an Instagram story or utilize Instagram’s new feature, IGTV. With this trend becoming more and more popular, the time has come to learn how to properly record video with your DSLR camera. With different brands, the camera concepts of recording video might change but nonetheless, the fundamentals are usually the same. In this article, I will be sharing with you some of those fundamental tips and tricks as to how you can properly record videos with your DSLR camera.

1. Set Your Camera To Video

Like every DSLR you should have a series of options on your dial to select the modes of your choice. Whether it be fully auto mode or portrait mode, these modes will be available on your dial. You will need to select the mode that dictates video. This icon usually takes the same as an old school video camera or the dial might just say video. Once you’ve selected this mode, you’ve already made the first step in learning how to record video on your camera.

2. Use Manual Focus

Even though autofocus is easy as a beginner, I wouldn’t recommend getting used to it too much as it is not the best option when doing videography. Depending on your camera’s capabilities, the autofocus option might be appealing to you but in the field of videography it is not something is made a habit. If you’re not already shooting with a fully manual lens, I recommend you look into purchasing one or flipping that little switch on the side of your lens to MF (manual focus). It may seem difficult at first but with a little practice, I promise it becomes so much easier to manipulate and use.


3. Recording Sound

If you plan to invest time and creativity into the art of videography then you should also consider getting a mic. Most DSLR camera does come with built-in mics but to be frank, nobody really uses them. They tend to not perform well when it comes to sound quality, noise cancellation, and overall performance. The most popular and affordable mic on the market for its quality is the Rode Shotgun Mic. This mic is very lightweight and performs pretty well for the price tag attached. You can easily find this mic on Amazon or any other photography site responsible for the sale of photography and videography equipment. This mic is used often by YouTubers and bloggers when recording video. Using a mic on your camera will help to improve your audio substantially and make your video that much more appealing.

4. Tripod


are one of the simple most used tools in photography but funny enough, it doesn’t get the praise it deserves. In videography its all about having steady hands to get a steady and appealing video. Tripods and Gimbals help in this case but depending on your budget, you can decide as to which you would like to invest in. However, when it comes to catching stable video and photographs, tripods are the way to go and will come in hand a lot throughout your practice in videography. I advise purchasing a very heavy duty or sturdy tripod as most DSLR cameras are not very lightweight and the chance of your camera tumbling over with a tripod that is not so sturdy is very likely. Check the specs on each tripod before making your purchase and also read reviews just to be sure it is sturdy enough for you.


5. Shoot In Sequences

Shooting continuously of an event or even any scene might be tempting but try to make a habit to shoot in different sequences for diversity when editing your clips. Shooting in sequences can come in helpful when editing because you can easily cut clips to match the music in your video if you have any. In addition to that, watching one scene or event for too long can become boring very quickly and lose the interest of whoever is going to be watching the clip. Keep it interesting with shot videos of different things,

6. Adjusting Your Settings

If you’re a beginner then I will inform you that when shooting video with your DSLR, it will not automatically adjust things such as your ISO for you. Different lighting situations determine different ISO levels and as a result of that, you will need to continuously preview and test your video before you actually begin to shoot. This should take anywhere between 5-10 minutes to adjust and be ready so don’t overthink it or worry too much. Depending on your camera settings or navigation of your buttons, adjusting your settings should be easily accessible and not too much of a hassle.

Completing A Session While Sick: Essential Tips You Need to Know

Being sick is always an inconvenience especially when you have a lot planned with your day or week. If you’re a freelancer like me, then on most days you can’t afford to be sick because you can’t afford to be losing money. Having a firm grip on the concept that time is actually money, you cannot accommodate any illness or be lazy due to an illness. Sadly, we never really plan to become sick unless you’re trying to get a few days off from work but in other regards, it pretty much just happens. With that said, I will be sharing with you some tips as to how you can get through a busy week or just a busy day as a photography while you’re sick. This article will relate perfectly to a photographer fighting the flu as this is the most common illness amongst us.

1. Don’t Do Too Much

You have to first take into consideration the limits of your body as you are not completely well. As a result of this, I always advise taking everything a step at a time and not overdoing it. While it is logical and makes a lot of sense to want to stay as productive as possible, at the same time you don’t want to push yourself too hard and do more harm than good. If you have an upcoming shoot, try to take it slow at least the day before and get your set up in place.

If you have a helping hand who’s currently a lot more healthy than you are at the moment then I advise you to let them do most of the work. As freelancers or even as a photographer you tend to enjoy doing a couple things on your own and having control of your set but at some point, you should accept some help. Once your set up is done and you’ve successfully prepared yourself for your upcoming session, you can then prepare yourself to rest. Focus on the things that are immediately important and do those that are not much importance at a time when you have more energy.

2. Rest

Speaking of preparing yourself for rest, leads me to my next point. Don’t you dare think that it is in your best interest to stay up late and watch Netflix movies or even try to do some post-production work late at night? You eventually end up robbing yourself of the adequate rest you need to get through the day. Always remind yourself that your body is not operating at its full functionality at the moment and you might find yourself getting very tired in a short span of time.


It is advised by doctors and individuals in the medical field that the body needs a full eight hours of sleep. I am no doctor but I believe if you’re ill, you should at least try to get 9-10 hours of sleep so your body has gotten adequate rest and some extra hours as well. Rest is important, not only when you’re sick but also when you’re completely healthy. Your body and health are more important than your photography session, therefore you should aim to make it a priority and not subject yourself to feeling worse than you already do.

3. Diet Change

I know for a fact some if not all of us have your guilty pleasures that we enjoy so much and have a hard time saying no to. However, for a moment when you take a break from your session, make it a habit to eat a few healthy things. Take some vitamins and try something that will help to improve your immune system and not just make you feel full. Your body reacts as a result as to what you put in it. Therefore if you’re used to eating junk all the time then be prepared for your body not feel all that great.

I promise I’m no health and fitness coach but I promise you to feel a difference once you’ve changed your diet during this time of illness. I will also encourage you to continue eating healthy so it helps to prevent any future illnesses as well. Being a photographer is a hectic job and I know sometimes you might not find the time to make a proper meal and can only grab a snack so consider some healthy options to help you be productive throughout your sessions.

4. Cut Back On Your Interactions

It’s usually a photographers job to interact with his model or client while on the job to give them creative direction or even make them feel comfortable. Sadly when you’re sick, you might want to cut back on this. After making the client or model aware of your illness, I advise you minimize the interaction with them as much as possible. This is not to be disrespectful or scornful but more so to show a sign of respect and common decency that you would not like to affect them in any way. If possible, have a friend or assistant on set with you to aid in these interactions between you and your model. This will professionalism and effort as you are trying to ensure you do not get your client or model sick.


It’s been such a pleasure sharing these simple but effective tips with you. I hope you never get sick and have to use them but if you do, I assure you these steps will help you get through that day or week with your photography sessions.

What To Pack For Fall Photography

The most fantastic season of the year, in my opinion, is fall. It is filled with so many colors and textures that motivate you to go outside and create. As a photographer, nothing gets me more excited than playing with some colors during a shoot or post-production. Fall is one of the best times of the year to create stunning or compelling images that will leave viewers speechless. This article will stand to inform you about some of the things you will need when heading out to capture some great fall shots as well as a few tips as to what you need to do to make your fall pictures stand out from the rest.

1. Lens Choice

This is subjective to the type of photography you’re doing but there are few lenses I would recommend that will come in handy more than you think. The first lens I would have in my camera bag is my 35mm f/2.8 Canon lens which always comes in handy when I need it to. The 35mm gives me the option of capturing great portraits along with a little bit of landscape here and there but it’s a smooth transition in-between. The aperture is white enough for me as fall pictures are taken in the day and not in low light. I sometimes keep it at about f/4 just to increase the sharpness in my image.


The second lens which I also keep in my bag is my Canon 50mm f/1.8. I remember in a previous article I explained that I rarely leave home without my 50mm as it always saves the day when I need it to. Of course, I use this mainly for Fall Portraits or if I just want to have a nice even blurred background in my shot then my 50mm does that very well. Last but not least, I also keep my Canon EF 24-70mm f/2.8L II USM on me as well as it comes in handy when I want to transition from hiding shoots to a few close-ups. I would recommend taking a telephoto lens as well but that is completely depending on what you want to shoot as well if you don’t want to walk with all that extra gear.

2. Timing Is Everything

I’m sure you’ve heard this already if not from me then from another photographer as well. That’s because it’s a fact that everything you do in photography is all about the right timing and knowing when to act. Knowing when to act also comes with patience and when you combine all these things together you are always gifted with an amazing shot. When it comes to photography in the fall, there are a few things you should time well and one of those are the wind.


In the fall its very windy and the leaves on trees are falling very easily and quickly so you want to make sure you capture what you need just in time. If you’re shooting a model or talent you want to make sure you’re getting that timing correct as well because what might be a full tree with beautiful orange leaves might just be half empty after a gust of wind.
In addition to timing the wind properly, you might also want to consider capturing sunset images in the fall as the colors from the sunset match beautifully with the trees and leaves during the fall season. Give it a try and you will definitely thank me later.

3. Get Higher

It always great to change your perspective and shoot from a higher vantage point. Fall consists of so many beautiful and vivid colors that will have you look in awe after capturing your image. Getting to a higher vantage point will help you to capture wide shots to showcase all these colors and make your image pop even more. Changing your perspective can make a huge difference in your photos so don’t be afraid to give it a shot.

4. Tripod

I know I’ve said this only a million times but I will say it again, don’t forget to pack your tripod before leaving home. If you plan to take stunning landscape shots then its only right you pack a sturdy and reliable tripod. As I mentioned earlier, the wind gusts in the fall can be very harsh and I don’t think you want to be in the middle of capturing a landscape shot ad your whole camera tumbles over. If possible have a little sandbag with you for added support. Tripod will always be a tool to assist you in getting the sharpest shot possible so don’t neglect it.


5. Pack Filters

When shooting fall tree or just fall leaves in general, it always helps if you have an enhancing filter on the front of your lens. Shooting fall colors might look flat before post production but you can make those colors even better with red intensifier type filter slapped on the front of your lens. Please don’t actually slap it on to the front of your lens .. just kidding.

Its been great sharing these tips and tricks with you guys and I hope to do soon very soon again. Until next time, take care and keep being creative.

Why Photography Blogs And Reviews Are Important For Beginners

Blogging has become a popular trend, not along amongst companies but individuals as well. More and more influencers make it their duty to provide readers with different blogs to keep them updated on a certain topic or just to keep them informed. More and more individuals have sought to make a business or brand out of blogging which has proven to be helpful for readers across the world. In this article, I aim to share some tips with you as to why reading photography blogs and reviews are important. Aside from the fact that our team at sleeklens are awesome at their job, here are some reasons.

1. Get Expert Opinions

Most photography blogs or reviews are written by professionals who have an ample amount of years experience in the field they’re speaking about. Reading blogs written by these professionals not only gives you the opinions of an experienced expert but it also helps you to understand complex concepts a bit easier. Some informative sites tend to throw information in your face without many contexts or even a personal touch. Learning from experts through this medium will help you to feel as if you’re having a conversation and not just reading a new letter.

2. Different Perspectives

It’s always important to hear the views of different creatives on a particular topic. This doesn’t only encourage you to form your own educated opinion but it also encourages you to think outside of the box for a bit. Sometimes we tend to see a certain topic with a very narrow train of thought and become so obsessed and stubborn to whatever it is we believe in. Not saying this is completely wrong but no one is always right so it’s always good to be receptive to the views from others like yourself.


In addition to that, as a beginner, you should make it a habit to read and acknowledge different ideas and perspectives. Once you’ve done that, It becomes easy to find the common denominator in all these blog posts or reviews and come to an educated conclusion.

3. A Community

Here at Sleeklens, we are a community of blog writers and reviewers who share a common interest and goal to supply readers with accurate and reliable information to serve as a helping hand in their creative process as a photographer or videographer. As a community, it is safe to say that we look out for the benefits of our readers and aim to keep them as updated as possible. As a beginner, becoming a part of a blog site or signing up to receive updates makes you apart of a community that will only help you to improve. This also gives you the opportunity to share your opinions as well and be heard through comments being welcomed. At that point, it is no longer just the blogger writing and you reading but it is a conversation.

4. Form Connections

Blog posts and reviews also help to amplify how we connect and network through social media platforms. You can now click a link and easily have the access to email or even send a direct message to the person who wrote the article. This makes professional photographers a lot more accessible to beginners and makes the process of networking and forming relationships or connections a lot easier. We are in an age where many things are accessible by just a few taps on a screen which has proven to be beneficial to the creative or photography industry.

5. Gives A Voice To Introverts

Most creatives like myself are quiet and not often do you find us sharing our opinion or having a discussion with other individuals. Blogs tend to open up a door for us to have a voice and educate others on what we know and what we have experienced. When you’re a beginner, reading blogs and reviews from those who didn’t usually have a voice can be so exciting and inspirational to you as an upcoming photographer to make your voice be heard. As photographers, we experience and tolerate a lot of things in our career. These experiences and challenges shape and mold us into the photographer we are today so we can share those tips with others.


I truly hope this article has inspired you to invest more time reading and understanding photography blogs and reviews. As a beginner, it is important to gain a general understanding of what it is you’re doing from different sources or different experts. The world of becoming a photographer can be filled with so much anxiety, confusion and even become lonely at times. However, always remember to stay motivated and let your passion lead you in the right direction. Thank you for stopping by and until next time, take care.